Richard gemburk
DEINCES AND LORIE ARE BUT THE CREATINOP KINCS.
JAN HONESTMANS THE NORLEST WORK (EGO
EX LIBRIS JOHN GRIBBEL
ST. AUSTELL HALL

Cavan, Richard Lambart
6th ears of
Eu


Nathanael
Gune
e
NE W SY S TEM
Rhode Island
Ο F
M I L I T A RY
DISCIPLINE,
FOUNDED UPON PRINCIPLE.
By
A
GENERAL OFFICE R.
GDL
evo
Ρ Η Ι Ι Α D E 1 Ρ Η Ι Α :
PRINTED AND SOLD BY R. AITKEN, PRINTER AND BOOKSELLER
OPPOSITE THE LONDON COFFLe-House, FRONT-STREET.
M.DCC.LXXVI.
Price, in Boards, One Dellar, Bound, Ten Shillings.

DLDED
D C

Τ Η Ε
P R E F A C Ε.
IT
T being an obſervation, that the more confident a
man is of his own capacity, with ſo much the great-
er reſolution he will act; and, on the other hand, it
being alſo obſerved, that nothing diſcourages a man
more, or intimidates him ſooner, than a knowledge,
or ſuppoſition, of his not being upon equal terms with
his adverſary: Hence then it is that diſcipline becomes
neceſſary; in order to inſtruct ſoldiers in ſuch a man-
ner, that the knowledge which they acquire in a dex-
terous uſe and management of their arms, and in a
ſkilful arrangement of themſelves, may ſerve, as well
to encourage them to a due diſcharge of their duty, as
to prevent their being intimidated, by conſidering them-
felves inferior to thoſe with whom they are to contend.
To frame a ſyſtem for theſe important purpoſes, it
will be indifpenfably neceſſary to keep three objects con-
ftantly in view.
The firſt is, that it be founded upon
principle, in crder to give it weight and ſtability.
The next is, that nothing whimfical, hypothetical, or
trifling appear in it; which may prompt a man to re-
ceive it with contempt or indifference, and thence to
diſregard it. And the laſt is, that it be calculated for
the emotions of the human heart, or for what the ge-
nerality of men are moſt capable of effecting in time of
action; and how far this laſt alone is truly neceffary,
let us, but for a moment, only ſuppoſe ourſelves in
that fituation, where every ſcene, that can dethrone
A 2
our

iv
THE PREF A CE.
our fortitude, or can fink us into timid apprehenfions,
preſents itfelf; and, where nothing is left but proud
reflection to invigorate and keep us up; we fhall then
quickly perceive the neceffity for that fimplicity of dif-
cipline, which is moſt practical in itſelf, and beſt a-
dapted to thoſe trying circumſtances.
Upon the above plan then I have founded the fol-
lowing fyftem, being perfuaded, that if an exerciſe is
not calculated for, and fuited to theſe important pur-
poſes, it will never produce the effect required. But,
as every ſyſtem ſhould be ſupported and governed in
itſelf, by particular laws or principles, that it may thun
the appellation of a whimſical or ſpeculative perform-
ance,
I have therefore obſerved that rule, hoping it
may ſerve, as well to recommend, as to give weight to
the plan I have choſen. And as this performance,
which I now take the liberty of offering, is but an at-
tempt calculated to point out how the military, like all
other ſciences, may be reſcued from caprice, and eſta-
bliſhed upon principle ; and as I am led to believe,
that it is the firſt of its kind that has ever been written,
I therefore hope for the greater indulgence, and that
it will to the candid ſuggeſt an apology for any defects
or inaccuracies it may contain ; there being throughout
the whole a great deal of new matter.
And as all ſciences have their peculiar graduates,
as well to inſtruct pupils in their rudiments, as to bring
them on to the higher elements of their profeſſion ; I
have therefore allotted to the corporal, to the ferjeant,
and to the adjutant, their different degrees of inſtruc-
tion, the better, that each may be reſponſible for thoſe
committed to his charge; and by that means, that the
exerciſe may be more correctly and expeditiouſly learn-
ed. The corporal, for inſtance, is, on his part, to
teach

THE
V
PREF A CE.
teach his men, to ſtand, to face, to march, and to
wheel. The ferjeant is to inſtruct his men in the uſe
and management of their arms. And the adjutant is to
inform thoſe intruſted to his care in the different ar-
rangements of the line, the column, and the ſquare.
By thus afligning to the corporal, to the ferjeant,
and to the adjutant, the rudimental parts of the exer-
ciſe, the time of exerciſe will, by that means, be con-
fiderably ſhortened ; as there will then be no occaſion
for a repetition of thoſe initiating forms, when the
men come to be exerciſed by a commiffioned officer,
they being already grounded in thoſe points by the pro-
per people. In deed, where ſuch minutie are dwelt
upon by an officer, I cannot help thinking that ſuch a
conduct is, not only acting out of character, by ferv-
ing to level and confound diſtinctions ; but, in itſelf,
carries much the ſame kind of propriety with it, as to
You once had occaſion in
your child-
hood for leading ſtrings, and therefore you ſhould ne-
ver appear without them.”. But however, though I
have known many an officer acquire a conſiderable
reputation by that means, he ought nevertheleſs to
preſerve a ſuitable dignity for himſelf, and according-
ly, he ſhould leave thoſe littleneſſes to thoſe below
him, it being fufficient that where he finds any of his
men aukward or defective in their exerciſe, to remand
them at once to the proper drill, whether of the
corpo-
ral, the ferjeant, or the adjutant, for better inſtruca
tion.
After the different exerciſes, of the corporal, the
ſerjeant, and the adjutant, are gone through, I then
introduce the whole exerciſe complete, as it is to be
performed by word of command from the major, or a-
ny other commiffioned officer, annexing, for brevity
fake,
tell a man,
>

vi
Τ THЕ РRЕ FACE.
fake, a reference of explanation to each word of com-
mand; in order, as well to avoid a repetition of the
fame thing, as to indicate in the proper place, the
number of motions belonging to each word of com-
mand, deſcribing with it the uſe and intent of the ope-
ration itſelf.
The following exerciſe I have divided into two
parts, diſtinguiſhing the one by the appellation of The
Parade Exerciſe ; and the other by that of The Field
Exerciſe. The Parade Exerciſe is then to confiſt of
the ceremonial parts of the ſervice; and of ſuch other
introductory parts, as of neceſſity lead to, and are
blended with, the Field Exerciſe. And the Field Ex-
erciſe is to comprehend ſuch operations, as are necefla-
ry to be performed againſt the enemy, as different exi-
gencies may there require. Why I have adopted the
terms, Parade and Field exerciſe, is for this reaſon; as
being words in themſelves, which are not only infinite-
ly more fignificant and comprehenſive, but convey by
far a clearer idea of the operations ſuitable to thoſe
places, than the old terms, Manual and Platoon exer-
ciſe ; which are, at the beſt, but terms only reconcile-
able by uſe, but not by ſenfe.
In our preſent exerciſe there are many things,
which, I confeſs, I cannot approve, as being in them-
ſelves either impracticable, or extremely inconvenient.
Some of which I have altered, and others I have reject-
ed; and as to what I have ſubſtituted, to ſuch I have
fubjoined my reaſons.
In this work I have introduced a new method of
Locking-up, finding, in my opinion, our preſent form
extremely defective, and liable to great diſorder and
inconvenience.
In

THE PRE FACE.
vii
In the different arrangement of the Line, the Con
lumn, and the Square, I have likewiſe introduced fome
amendments and alterations. In the Line, I have
kept one object conſtantly in view, namely, to poſt the
officers where they can be moſt ſerviceable ; by which
means the battalion will at all times be kept up in a
cloſe, compact, and good order, whether in ſtanding,
advancing, or retreating; and, at the ſame time, free
of all incumbrance.
In treating of the Column, I have endeavoured to
point out the various uſes and purpoſes of it ; ſhewing
how and on what occaſion it is to be formed, whether
it is then to conſiſt of ranks, of files, or compounded
of both.
And in reſpect to the Square, I have touched upon
fome capital defects, not only in our prefent method of
forming it, but in making the platoons or divifions,
which are appointed to cover or protect the angles, to
retire on firing into the ſquare itſelf. To obviate
theſe matters, I have offered an amendment, by which
I think the ſquare will be rendered both formidable and
ſecure. I have alſo directed, how and in what fitua-
tion it is to be formed, and how to reduce it when the
occaſion ceaſes. And in pointing out the uſes of it, I
have explained the different capacities of ſquares to
each other, according to the number of battalions of
which each is compoſed; there being but very few,
who can otherwiſe comprehend this neceffary piece of
knowledge, that are not poffeffed of ſome ſmall degree
of mathematical learning.
In the different operations of the above arrange-
ments, I have fhewn how the ſeveral movements are to
be effected, by ſuitable and diſtinct fignals of the drum;
being well ſatisfied of no better method, by which
troops

viii
THE PREFACE.
troops can more effectually be directed in time of ac-
tion. A due obſervance of which is, I may venture
to pronounce, one of the moſt principal excellencies in
diſcipline, and I could therefore wiſh to ſee it more
attended to; for certain it is, that the monotony,
which will do for a cool and calm parade, will by no
means be proper for the hot and turbulent element of
boiſterous action ; conſequently, a ſuitable variety of
ſignals is neceſſary to obſerve and adopt.
I have concluded this treatiſe with an appendix,
containing rules, maxims, and obſervations for the
government, conduct and diſcipline of an army. They
are undoubtedly, for fo comprehenſive a purpoſe, ve-
ry defective in themſelves. I lament that my experi-
ence had not enabled me to render them more com-
plete ; but I offer them with a good intent, fubmitting
and referring the whole to the judgment of my brother
officers,
OBSERVATIONS

OBSERVATIONS
Ο Ν Τ Η Ε
DRESS, ARMS, AND ACCOUTREMENTS,
OF A
SO
S O L DIE R.
C HA P. I.
Ρ
Sect. I. Of Dreſs.
IT
TT is with the military, as with all other profeſſions,
if the individuals of which are not properly ap-
pointed, and a ſuitable proviſion made for them,
they will never be able to acquit themſelves, or to give
the ſatisfaction which may be required of them. And as
this poſition is univerſally admitted, I conclude it will
not be improper in this place to make ſome obſerva-
tions on the Dreſs, Arms, and Accoutrements, of
our Soldiers ; and to offer ſome amendments and al-
terations in thoſe articles, where I fhall judge them
to be defective.
The Dreſs then of a Soldier ſhould ſerve in the firſt
place, to preſerve health. Next, to give ſprightlineſs
and appearance to the man, and to characterize him
in his profeffion. And laſtly, to give reputation to
B
the

10
NEW SYSTEM OF
с
the ſervice, in which he is engaged. Nor ought it
to be leſs calculated for the purpoſe of Convenience,
having it fo contrived, as neither to obſtruct or im-
pede him in his motions; nor to occafion trouble and
delay, where equipment is required in the eafieſt
manner, and in the ſhorteſt time. The above being
the chief ends of a military Dreſs, what I ſhall offer
concerning them, I propoſe to deliver under the fol-
lowing articles ; namely, Cloathing, Convenience, and
Appearance.
ART. I. Of Cloathing.
The ſeveral articles of cloathing ought, in them-
felves, to be fubftantial, ftrong, and good; and
adapted to the country or climate in which the foldier
is to ſerve : fince the preſervation of health, which is
the chief intent of cloathing, will every where be
found the greateſt Economy. His cloaths, therefore,
ought to be well made and put together; and fuffici-
ent to laft, by ordinary repairs, the intended time.
Nor ſhould they be incumbered with any frivolous
and finical ornaments, which are ſoon worn out, and
eaſily defaced ; eſpecially, where ſuitable materials
cannot conveniently be had to mend or reinſtate them.
ART. II. Of Convenience.
It is an eſtabliſhed maxim, that nothing is military
which is in itſelf either tedious or inconvenient; confe-
quently, the beſt materials for dreſs, if not well cal-
culated for that end, loſe of their eſtimation; and,
inſtead of their being convenient and ſatisfactory, be-
come troubleſome and diſguſtful. Now, to apply this
obſervation,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
II
9
obſervation, I ſhall bring it home to ourſelves; our
materials then, are in general tolerably good, but the
purpoſes to which they are converted will admit of
ſome principal exceptions, and thoſe are as follow.
The firſt thing, then, which I ſhall touch upon, is
our Grenadier-cap, which is ſo badly contrived, as nei-
ther to be fit for uſe or ſervice. The height of it a-
bove the head is ſo enormous, that any inclination or
agile motion of the body, will cauſe it immediately to
tumble off. If the country, through which the man
is ordered to proceed, happens to be either buſhy or
woody, off goes the cap at every branch, briar, or
twig, which comes in its way; and the ſame incon-
venience he meets with from every other object that it
ſtrikes againſt. If the weather be windy, the cap is
every now and then blown off; or it be duſty and
ſcorching, it affords no ſort of ſhelter whatever to the
face and eyes; or if the weather be rainy, it yields as
little covering to the neck and ſhoulders. In ſhort,
it is ſo aukward a piece of apparel, as to have nothing
whatever to recommend or reconcile it to us, but our
being accuſtomed to it; except, like the whiſkers of
old, it may be deemed neceſſary to frighten an enemy,
which I believe is a circumſtance now-a-days, upon
which no foldier will place the ſlighteſt dependance.
The Hat is another article of dreſs, which, though
infinitely preferable to the cap, yet is not without ſome
weighty objections; for by its projection over the
ſhoulders, it is extremely incommodious to the man,
when in the ranks or under arms, it being then liable,
either by his own motions or by thoſe of others, to be
cafily thrown off, which frequently happens. Nor is
it much leſs troubleſome than the cap, in a buſhy or
woody country, or in windy weather; as thoſe incidents
B 2
do

I 2
NEW SYSTEM OF
do ever occaſion it, only to fall off, but to teaſe
and incommode the man; beſides its being of that fort
of apparel, which is eaſily disfigured by the cocks
lofing their ſet and form, and then nothing is more
unbecoming
Thefe being fome of the principal objections to
the Cap and Hat, the remedy which I would offer
in order to remove them, is to fubftitute in their
room, the ſmall tight cloſe leather Helmet, made not
only fufficiently ſtrong to refift the blow of a ſword,
but to have a curtain appending to it, which may be
occaſionally ufed, either to roll up in dry weather,
or in wet to let down for the purpoſe of preſerving
the neck and ſhoulders from the rain. Beſides the ad-
dition of the Curtain, I would alſo have that of a Flap
or Frontiſpiece to let likewiſe down before, for the con-
venience of ſaving the eyes from duft, and from the
heat and rays of the fun, which are circumſtances,
if not guarded againſt, that muſt ever be affecting
to the fight of the man.
The Roler about the neck is another part of dreſs ta
which I very much object: becauſe the man alone
cannot, in that particular, dreſs himſelf, but muſt have
the affiftance of another to help him, which muſt
be allowed a very inconvenient circumſtance. And,
by having his neck ſo ſwathed about with ſo long a
bandage, the circulation of the blood is conſequently
obſtructed; by which means, it is no uncommon
thing to obſerve, when men are under arms, but
more eſpecially upon a march, that they frequently
drop down into fits, and often expire.
To prevent circumſtances fo bad in themſelves, I
would recommend, inſtead of the Roler, a Stock
with clafps, which the man can, of himſelf, imme-
diately

MILITARY DISCIPLINE
13
diately put on or take off, and loofen or tighten at
pleaſure.
The make of the Coat is another article to which I
have much diſlike, on account of the great heap and
load of ſkirts appending to it, which are neither long
enough to keep the men warm in cold weather, nor
ſhort enough to render him active and cool where
agility and labour is required of him, and ſerving
only to fatigue and encumber him in all his opera-
tions, and to be of no uſe or ſervice whatever to
him on any occafion; beſides the injury thoſe ſkirts
do to his health, ſhould he happen to lie down
when they are wet, either upon his guard-bed or
in his tent. In ſhort, the inconvenience of the coat
in this particular, is ſo well known to all thoſe who
follow any active laborious way of life, that they
are ſeldom or never ſeen, while at work, with their
To purſue then an example fo well found-
ed, both upon reaſon and experience, and to avoid
the inconveniencies above mentioned, I would ſub-
ftitute inſtead of the coat, the common tight light
Jacket.
Our Spatterdafbes, are another part of dreſs, to
which I have likewiſe great objections. The Spat-
terdaſhes I mean, are thoſe made of canvaſs, to but-
ton tight, and to come half way up the thigh, with
upwards of two dozen of buttons to each. I need
not repreſent how long a time it will take up to put on
a pair of thoſe Spatterdaſhes, as it will eaſily be
conceived. But befides the trouble of this tedious
operation, there is the well known perplexity of every
now and then tearing open a button-hole, and the
pulling off a button; and by the delay thus accident-
ally occafioned in the mending of which, I have
known
coats on.

14
NEW SYSTEM OF
known many a good foldier puniſhed for the not
appearing at the time appointed. But, befides this
great inconvenience in putting them on, there is ano-
ther very ſtrong objection to them; for by the leg
and part of the thigh being thus buttoned and braced
up, the agility at the knee is of courſe obſtructed.
And as the legs of moſt men will, on or after long
walking, fwell a little, the pain then arifing becomes quite
intollerable, by the want of room in the Spatterdafh
for the limb to eafe itſelf. And next, by their be-
ing made of canvaſs, they are but very ill calculated
to defend the legs againſt briars and thorns; beſides
their being ſoon worn out about the ankles and knees,
by the continual ſtreſs and friction which they are
expoſed to in thoſe parts.
Now what I would offer to obviate thofe ſeveral
inconveniences, is to ſubſtitute the fort of Spatter-
daſhes commonly worn by gentlemen in riding. They
are made of ſupple leather, and toped with a piece of
what is ſtrong and ſtiff. They come ſo high as to
cover the caps of the knees, and there fit as cloſe
and tight as light boots commonly do ; but I would
have them to come rather higher, the better to de-
fend the knees, and to preſerve the breeches, when
the men come to kneel, either at their exerciſe, or
on any other occafion. Each of theſe fort of Spat-
terdaſhes has but two buttons, one juſt below the
knee, and the other cloſe to the foot Thoſe buttons
are made of a bit of flat iron, fo as to turn and make
faſt after they have entered a ſmall iron button-hole.
And in order to keep them cloſe to the legs, there
is alſo added to each edge of the Spatterdafh,
piece of ſtrong flated wire, faſtened at each end to
the buttons and button holes The advantages of
thoſe
a

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
15
thoſe Spatterdaſhes are, that they are ſo foon put on,
as ſcarce to exceed the time of half a minute, and
are ſo pliant to the legs, as to give way to them occa-
fionally. But it may be objected, that the expence
of them will be too great for Soldiers.
I anſwer not,
for as they will laſt conſiderably longer than thoſe
made of canvaſs, they will in the end be found to be
much cheaper.
The Dreſs of the Hair is another very effential arti-
cle in point of convenience and cleanlineſs, of which
we feem altogether unmindful; having at preſent no
other form, but either the Tuck, the Cue, or the
Club. The time of adjuſting either is evidently fo ve-
ry
tedious and troubleſome, of which the men them-
ſelves are fo fenfible, that in order to avoid that in-
convenience, and to have more time for other
pur-
poſes, they frequently let their hair remain in one or
other of thoſe forms for ſome days together, giving it
occaſionally, without opening and combing it, a fort
of outward flight dreſſing, by way of concealing their
neglect from their officers; the ill confequence of
which is, that the man by not daily combing his head,
the ſkin contracts, in a ſmall ſpace of time, not only
ſtagnated humours, which break out into ſcabs and
ulcers, but an accumulated mixture of filth, dirt,
and vermin, which proves as pernicious to the man
himſelf, as it becomes infectious to others.
To prevent on one hand fo great an inconvenience,
and on the other to guard againſt the bad confe-
quence attending it, I would have the hair cut ſhort
and tapering, and to come no lower than the upper
edge of the S ock, by which means the head will eafi-
ly be kept clean and cool, and the inconvenience of a
tedious dreſs will be as much avoided.
ART.

16
NEW SYSTEM OF
ART, III. Of Appearance.
The Appearance of a Soldier conſiſts in being al-
ways dreffed in character, and conformable to the
rules of his corps. He ought therefore to appear clean
and neat in his perfon : his hair well combed ; his
hat well bruſhed and cocked ; his cloaths in good or-
der, having neither dirt, duft or ſpots upon them ; and
his linen, ſtockings, ſhoes and buckles, clean and in
repair. In ſhort, every thing about him ſhould ap-
pear good calculated for decency and uſe, and adapt-
ed to the times, whether upon or off Duty; or whe-
ther in the condition of the private or the public man.
The advantages of this Appearance are many : It
gives a reputation to the ſervice and corps in which
he is, and is a ſtrong inducement to others to enter
into it; and, above all, it naturally inſpires a man
with a pride of fpirit, which is the greateſt preſerva-
tive againſt mean and unbecoming actions.
There is another article in the Dreſs of a Soldier,
which, above all others, contributes the moft to
ſtately carriage of his perfon, and which I think is not
in general fufficiently attended to ; I mean, the wear-
ing well of the Hat. I have often lamented an over-
fight of ſuch conſequence, there being no one part of
Dreſs which makes a man appear to greater advan-
tage than that alone; it is a circumſtance fo ftriking
in itſelf, that it commonly conveys a characteriſtical i-
dea of the man; and according to the impreſſion his
appearance fo makes, a concluſion is often formed of
him. The rule therefore I ſhall give is as follows:
a
That the Hat do fit horizontally upon the head, and
that it be worn so low on the forehead as to preſs a little
down

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
17
down upon the eyebrows, letting the forecock be turned
withal a little to the left, by way of an air.
In wearing the hat as thus directed, there is an ad-
vantage as well as an ornament in it. It may be ob
ſerved, that when a man ſtoops or holds down his
head with his hat off, the very decline of his face will
prevent, in a great meaſure, his having an elevated or
horizontal view; and ſhould he, in that attitude,
wear his hat according to the above rule, it is as evi-
dent that his view will be the more obſtructed by the
intervention of the cock of the hat. This being the
caſe, and he finding the inconvenience of it, he will
naturally, in order to avoid it, hold up his head that
he may have the advantage of a better view ; and by
fo holding up his head the conſequence will as natu-
rally lead him to carry his body erect, which becomes
an ornament to his perſon. Hence then it is, that
there is no inſtance where a man wears his hat preſſed
well' down upon his eyebrows whoſe carriage has been
otherwiſe than conſtantly erect.
Indeed there is, beſides the above, another very
conſiderable advantage in this wear of the hat; it
may likewiſe be obſerved that the forehead is the only
inexpreflive part of the whole face, every other fea-
ture having both action and fignificance in it. Hence
it is, that by the forehead being thus hid by the hat
and nothing preſented to view but the animated parts
of the face, the man appears no leſs conſiderable in
his afpect than elevated in his perfon.
As to the form of cocking the hat, I acknowledge
myſelf a little timorous about preſcribing a rule for it,
there being ſo great a variety of opinions on that head;
but were I to chooſe I ſhould prefer that cock which
would keep its form beſt and longeſt, and at the ſame
time cauſe a man to look fprightly in his appearance.
с
SECT,

NEW SYSTEM OF
SECT. II. Of Arms.
a
THE Arms of a Foot-Soldier confift of a firelock
and bayonet, which, when fixed or joined together,
become the moſt formidable weapon that we know of,
being capable of vaſt execution either at a great or at
a ſmall diſtance, and when thus united anſwer all the
purpoſes of a miſlile or hand weapon; but, however,
as an active uſe of any weapon will chiefly depend
upon a proper conſtruction of it, it therefore follows,
that arms in themſelves will be more or leſs ſervice-
able, and that foldiers will have the power of manag-
ing them in a better or worſe manner in proportion
to the degree of the make, whether that conſiſts in
length, weight, or convenience; and for this reaſon I
ſhall venture to point out ſome capital defects in the
conſtructions of our firelock and bayonet, with a view
of offering a remedy, and with the hopes it will merit
fome attention,
a
ART. I. Of the Bayonet.
We have for the make of the Bayonet no other
rule or gage than to fit it to a particular firelock to
which it of courſe belongs : Now as the barrels of
different firelocks vary in thickneſs, and as the Sights
placed upon them at the muzzle by which the bayo-
nets fix, vary no leſs in ſize and poſition, ſo the bore
of the fockets of the bayonets, and the fixing grooves
made in them, muft vary accordingly in all or any of
theſe particulars ; therefore it is that ſcarce any bay-
onet can be found that will fit any other firelock than
that for which it was made; the diſadvantage of which
is

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
19
is this, that as ſoldiers are obliged in camp, on guard,
or on out-poſts, to keep their bayonets conſtantly by
them while their firelocks are frequently laid promiſ-
cuouſly together in a bell-tent, or in ſome other ap-
pointed place; I ſay then, that ſhould the men have
an immediate occaſion for their firelocks, they could
not ſo circumſtanced, have ſufficient time to receive
or take thoſe reſpectively belonging to themſelves, nor
indeed would it be proper to wait, left, before fuch a
diſtribution could be effected, an opportunity might
be loft, or the conſequence prove fatal; therefore as
each man muſt in prudence take the firſt that comes
to hand, the odds will then be very great, that the
firelock which he takes does not belong to himſelf,
and of courſe that the bayonet which he has by him
does not fit it, and ſhould that be the caſe, the misfor-
tune arifing may prove irreparable.
To remedy then ſo great a defect I would propoſe,
that as there is an eſtabliſhed caliber for all firelocks
in the ſervice, and as no reaſon can be aſſigned why
one firelock ſhould be made thicker or thinner in me-
tal at the muzzle than another; I would therefore
have all firelocks made alike in that particular: And
next, as every bayonet fixes by means of the fight
upon the barrel, I would alſo have all thoſe fights
made of equal fizes, and placed at equal diſtances
from their reſpective muzzles ; by which means, as
there would then be of courſe an eſtabliſhed
gage
for
the fockets and fixtures of all bayonets, every bayonet
would conſequently fit every firelock in the ſervice,
which would remedy the above defect, and prevent
any ill conſequence that may ariſe from it.
My next objection is to the great diſadvantage arif-
ing from the unneceffary weight of the Bayonet and
Rammer:
f
1
C 2

20
NEW SYSTEM OF
Rammer ; I mean only to ſhow when the bayonet is
fixed, the rammer in the ſtock, and the firelock pre-
fented, how the firelock then operates upon the
ſtrength of the arm, which is to ſupport it, and the
effect it has. This article may, at firſt view, ſeem
,
inconſiderable to thoſe who are not converſant in me-
chanics; but however that may be, we all know by
experience that the lighter any weapon can well be
made at the extremity from us, the more manageable
it becomes; and on the contrary, that the heavier it
is there, the greater degree of ſtrength it requires to
uſe it.
Now in order to fhew how the weight of the fire-
lock in the above pofition operates on the ſtrength of
the arm which ſupports it, I ſhall endeavour to de-
monſtrate by the property of the lever; and for which
purpoſe I ſhall conſider the firelock, at whoſe extre-
mity the bayonet is fixed, as a lever, whoſe length,
excluſive of the bayonet, is five feet two inches; and
I ſhall conſider the left hand that ſupports it, when
preſented, as the fulcrum of the lever, placed at the
diſtance of one foot ten inches from the but-end,orthree
feet fout inches from the muzzle, and I ſhall fuppofe
the weight of the bayonet to be feventeen ounces.
Then I ſay as one foot ten inches the diſtance from
the left hand to the but-end is to three feet four inches
the diſtance from that hand to the muzzle, fo is ſeven-
teen ounces the weight of the bayonet at the muzzle
to almoſt thirty-one ounces, the balancing or counter-
acting weight at the but; now as the fulcrum of every
lever, like the counterpoint part of the beam of a
pair of ſcales, fuſtains as well the whole force of
power, as the weight of that which counteracts it,
therefore, the left hand being here the fulcrum, will
be

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
21
be burdened with twice thirty one ounces, making
together fixty-two ounces : and if to which, be added
the force of that part of the bayonet extending be-
yond the muzzle, then that likewiſe will be found to
produce better than fix ounces more, and then the
whole burden reſting upon the left hand and arm,
which in general is the weakeſt, will be about fixty-
eight ounces, occaſioned only by the fixing of the
bayonet.
And again, to account for the iron rammer, whoſe
weight is better than ten ounces, but as the rammer
is lodged in pipes, lying parallel to the barrel, and
extending to the end of it; and as the rammer
is made tapering, and not truly a cylinder, its power
will be beſt and eafieft determined experimentally;
and as fuch it will occaſion a counteracting weight
of eleven ounces, which being alſo doubled, is twenty-
two ounces more, and that being added to the above
fixty-eight ounces, make together ninety ounces,
which added again to the weight of the firelock,
which is about ten pounds thirteen ounces, excluſive
the rammer and ſling, will about make in all fixteen
pounds ſeven ounces, the full weight which the left
hand is to ſupport when the firelock is preſented.
Hence the caufe of that great languor ſo evident,
when ſoldiers come to recover their firelocks from
the preſent, and of the violent pain they ſuffer in
their left arms at the time of preſenting, by being
thus overburdened and unable to bear that weight,
which muſt of courſe affect the ſteadineſs requiſite
in taking a proper aim, and conſequently render the
fire uncertain or ineffectual.
To remedy as much as poſſible ſo great a diſad-
vantage as the above, I would propoſe to have, in
the

22
NEW SYSTEM OF
the Bayonets made much lighter, and of the ſame
length and ſubſtance with thofe of the dragoons ;
and in the next, I would have wooden rammers as
formerly, inſtead of the preſent heavy iron ones,
which would cauſe in this laſt article alone, excluſive
of the bayonet, a difference in preſſure at the time of
preſenting, of at leaſt nineteen ounces ; in ſhort, the
beſt recommendation which I can offer for an alte-
ration, is to deſire any one to take a firelock in his
hand, and make a trial himſelf, and I am perſuaded
he will be immedately convinced, how neceſſary it is
to remove thoſe inconveniencies.
ART. II. Of the Firelock.
great, the
What I ſhall offer in the firſt place concerning
the firelock, is relative to its weight; in the adjuſting
of which, it ought to be an eſtabliſhed rule, « that
the weight of all be proportioned to the general
ſtrength of all thoſe who are to make uſe of them,
or rather made lighter;" confequently, ſhould that
weight be too
arms will then become
burdenſome and unweildy, and only ſerve to oppreſs
the man, and overpower his ſtrength in the diſcharge
of his duty. Now, as our arms are confefſedly un-
der this diſadvantage, I am therefore for diminiſhing
ſuch articles as may be judged ſuperfluous in them-
ſelves, and thoſe which I ſhall point out, are as
follows:
Firſt, I would have the barrel made on the out-
fide, like that of the fuſee, with two reinforced
rings placed at proper diſtances from the breech,
which improvement would occaſion it to be much
lighter by making the barrel ſo much the thinner
from

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
23
from thoſe rings towards the muzzle, and yet equally
ſerviceable, and ſtill more uſeful, ſince it would then
feel lighter at the muzzle, and conſequently more ma-
nageable: Next, I would have all that part of the
mounting, which is not much expoſed to violence,
to be made confiderably lighter than it is ; ſuch as the
rammer-pipes, the guard, and the upper part of the
cap of the butt; and likewiſe all the pins, with
whatever elſe will admit of being reduced : And laſt-
ly, I would have the fuſee lock introduced, inſtead
of the preſent large heavy one. And beſides thefe
alterations, there is another improvement which I much
wiſh for, and that is, to have at the breech a ſmall
Sight-channel made, for the advantage and convenience
of occafionally taking better aim.
The next article which I ſhall touch upon is the
wretched temper given to ſome of the principal parts
of the firelock. The vile practice of which is in
nothing more notorious than in the two following
inſtances. I have frequently obſerved, that our bar-
rels are in general ſo ſhamefully ſoft, that by only
the exerciſe of a few field days, they were ſo blown
at the touch-hole, as to be totally unfit for ſervice.
And I have likewiſe found the faces of hammers fo
fuperficially hardened, that in as fhort a ſpace of time,
the hardening was quite worn off, ſo as to cauſe little
or no fire at the ſnap of the flint, and this in fo great
a great degree, that I have often feen better than
half the firelocks of a company, in that terrible
condition.
SECT.

24
NEW SYSTEM OF
Sect. III. Of Accoutrements.
.
THE Accoutrements of a ſoldier, conſiſt of a
fhoulder-belt, to which his pouch is faftened or
buckled, and of a waiſt or ſword-belt, carrying his
bayonet, the leather of all which is called buff,
being the ſkin of the buffalo, and therefore ſtrong,
thick, heavy; and fpongy. The ſhoulder and waiſt
belt are each much of the ſame breadth, being about
three inches and a half broad. The leathers of the
pouch, fuch as the buckle-ſtraps, flap and pocket,
are commonly made of another ſort of dreſſed lea-
ther, but equally thick and heavy as that of the buff.
And as to the cartridge box of the pouch, it is made
of wood or tin, and ſo contrived, as commonly to
contain thirty-ſix cartridges, the whole weighing about
five pounds eight ounces; and if to that, be added
three pounds twelve ounces more, the weight of the
cartridges made up, with only fingle balls, together
with the weight of the bayonet, and alſo of the fints
and other convenient articles for keeping the fire-
lock clean and in good order, the whole weight
then taken together, will be very little ſhort of
eleven pounds eight ounces, hanging on the man's
body.
But the incumbrance of this weight, though great
in it itſelf, is not ſo intolerable, eſpecially on a march
or for any length of time, as the enormous breadth
of the belts, which compreffes the body to fuch a de-
gree, and excludes fo effectually every cooling breeze
from it, that the man in a ſhort ſpace of time, is
fo overheated, as to become quite languid and fa-
tigued, and incapable of every vigorous effort. When
this

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
25
this is the cafe, he naturally lays himſelf regardleſsly
down to reft, and in that oppreffed condition, feldom
eſcapes contracting fome diſorder or other, ſuch as
rheums, agues, fevers, &c. which commonly termi-
nate either in the loſs of his life, or the loſs of his
ſervice for a confiderable time. To remove then,
as far as convenience will admit, a cauſe productive
of ſuch bad effects, I would have thoſe belts made
conſiderably narrower, and that at the leaſt a third
more than what they are at preſent: The advantages
of which alteration would be, firſt the man would
feel himſelf more eaſy, cool, and light ; next, it
would give him a ſprightly and active appearance,
inſtead of being like an unwieldy champion truffed
up in a coat of mail; and, laſtly, by thus diminiſhing
the breadth of the belts, the expence in the purchaſe
of new Accoutrements would conſequently be pro-
portionably leflened, and that obtained without ſhort-
ening in the leaſt, the duration of the wear.
But before I conclude this article, I ſhall touch
upon another point, relative to the preſervation of
our Accoutrements, of which we ſeem to be totally
ignorant; what I mean, is our pernicious method of
cleaning them. The rule we follow is this: when the
Accoutrements want cleaning, the ſoldiers ſet the
ſeveral articles to ſoak in water, after which they
fcrape them with a ſharp knife, waſh them afreſh,
and colour them with a ſtuff prepared for the pur-
poſe. The conſequence of which is, that by thus
ſcraping them, they frequently, if not always, cut
and mangle them; and not only this, but the ſubſtance
of the leather is ſo waſted and impaired, that they
ſoon become quite thin and jagged at the edges ; be-
dfies the coat or nap of the buff being entirely fhaved
D
off,

26
NEW SYSTEM OF
off, which makes the ſurface appear black and horny,
fo that in a ſhort ſpace of time the accoutrements
are neither fit for ſervice or appearance, and feldom
laft a third of the time they otherways would. To
avoid this bad effect, others have ſubſtituted another
method, which is, that inſtead of ſcraping them,
as before deſcribed, they caufe the ſeveral pieces of
the leather to be rubbed or daubed over with a kind
of putty, made of pipe-maker's clay and fiże mixed
together, which when dry, ſticks ſo cloſe, as not
eaſily to be rubbed off; but to this method, there are
two objections; the firſt is, that when the accoutre-
ments come to be worn in wet weather, the rain fo
foftens the coat of colouring upon them, as to make
it run off, which ſpoils the cloaths, and disfigures
their appearance. The other objection is, that as the
.
colour is a pure white, and not reſembling the natu-
ral colour of the leather, it makes the cloaths and
trimmings, after they are about half worn, to appear
very ſhabby, and to great diſadvantage, the colour
being then too lively a contraſt to the ſoil upon the lace
and cloth.
Now what I would recommend, inſtead of either
of the above methods, is, firſt to ſet the accoutre-
ments to ſoak in water, and then to take out a piece
at a time, and lay it flat upon a board, with the
right ſide uppermoſt; this being done, let it be
rubbed over with ſome hard foap, and upon
which
ſprinkle a little fine fand ; then take a hard bruſh
dipped in water, and with it rub fufficiently the piece
to be cleaned ; this method will not only take off
all dirty and greaſy ſpots, much quicker than by
fcraping the parts with a knife, but it will preferve
the

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
27
the coat of the leather, and prevent the injurious
and bad conſequences already deſcribed.
The ſeveral parts of the Accoutrements being
thus prepared and handled, they are next to be well
waſhed and hung up; and after they are about half
dry, let them be dipped in the colouring tub and
ſet to dry thoroughly; then they are to be well duft-
ed and bruſhed, the buckles well cleaned and bright,
ened, and the ſeveral parts put together, and fixed
in their proper places.
The colouring made uſe of on this occaſion, is a
compoſition of whiting and ochre; the proportion
of each is commonly adjuſted by the fancy of the
commanding officer ; but the compoſition which I
think the moſt proper, is that which approaches
the neareſt to the natural colour of the leather, or
rather a degree brighter, which will be ſuitable to all
ſtages of wear, which the clothes may have,
D 2
CHAP

28.
NEW SYSTEM OF
CH A P. II.
The Duty of the Corporal.
Sect. I. Inſtructions,
1. TH.
I. THAT a convenient place or piece of ground
be afligned to the Corporal for the exerciſe
and inſtruction of ſuch recruits as are committed to
his charge, and that he do there proceed with them
at appointed times, in the following manner.
Note. The place where recruits are taught their
exerciſe, is called the Dril,
II. That he do firſt teach them feparately, or one
by one, and afterwards, according to their different
degrees of proficience, or the progreſs which each
makes, claſs, or put them into diſtinct Squads, that
thoſe who are moſt forward, may not be retarded,
and have unneceſſary trouble given them by the in-
docility, or aukwardneſs of the backward, and with
a view that they may be the fooner diſinifſed from
him, and placed under the care of the Serjeant.
III. That he be careful to teach them but one
diſtinct motion at a time, and that he never offer
at running from one thing to another, before they
are truly perfect in that which was firſt taught them ;
for accuracy and expertneſs in any ſcience can only
be acquired by gradual inſtruction and practice; juſt
as a drummer is taught to beat, firft by diſtinct
taps, and then as he becomes more expert, he
quickens his beats, till at laft, each tap or beat is
loft or unobſerved, in one continued roll on his drum.
IV. That

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
29
IV. That he do always cauſe a profound filence to
be obſerved, it being otherwiſe impoſſible to attend to
what is in hand.
V. That he do previouſly prepare their minds for
whatever they are to do, and that he do patiently ex-
plain the intent of things, in order that the buſineſs
they are upon may be the better comprehended, and
that his inſtructions may have the fuller effect, for all
men are but too apt to deſpiſe or neglect the thing
which they do not underſtand.
VI. That he do never overlook any remiffneſs or
inattention, without a proper admonition or rebuke ;
for now is the ſeaſon to fow the ſeeds of ſubordina-
tion.
VII. That no pique or prejudice appear in his cen-
fures, in order that juſtice and duty may approve his
proceedings, and prevent his recruits from early im-
bibing any malignant fpirit of murmur and diſcontent.
VIII. That he do upon all occaſions make himſelf
an example of order and punctuality to them.
IX. That he admit of no freedom or intimacy be-
tween him and any one ſubordinate to him.
X. That he never do admit the leaſt encroachment
of thofe fubordinate to him upon his authority.
SECT. II. Of Reſpect to Superiors,
A due deference to our Superiors may juſtly be
eſteemed and termed the firſt principle of diſcipline ;
it being a certainty, that where that is not obſerved, no
authority can poffibly exift: We are therefore, on
every occaſion, not only to teſtify our attention, fub-
miffion,
:

30
NEW SYSTEM OF
miſlion, and reſpect to all thoſe whom his Majeſty
ſhall think fit to place above us; but we are, by our
example, to induce others to do the ſame, and to ſee it
impreffed by times on the juvenile part of the army.
On this principle then, the corporal is firſt of all
to proceed with the recruits under his care, by duly
inſtructing them in an humble, decent, and proper
mode of behaviour to their ſuperiors; and, in order
to ground them the better in fo becoming a demean-
our, he is each morning to make them practice his
rules, and to ſee that they do obſerve then, and ac-
cording to the following directions.
Art. I. Of Deportment.
The Corporal is firſt to direct and inform his re-
cruits that whenever they are ſpoke to, either by him.
ſelf or by any other their ſuperior, they never offer
or preſume on the occaſion, to fit, lean, or appear in
any careleſs or indifferent pofture, but at once to raiſe
themſelves up, and to ſtand erect, and with a gra-
dual motion of the right hand to take off their hats,
letting the hat with both hands fall and hang eaſily
down by their fides. That their countenance be open,
calm, and attentive ; and that they give mild and
fubmiffive anſwers to all queſtions as may be aſked
them.
After which inſtruction, he is to take occafion to
ſpeak to them himſelf, and to aſk them queſtions, in
order to obſerve their behaviour, and to perfect them
in it.
ART.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
31
ART. II. Of the Standing Salute.
Before I proceed to lay down rules for the Salute,
I beg leave to explain what I comprehend of it, in
order that I may be the better underſtood. A Salute
then conveys to me an idea of gentleneſs and calmneſs,
in oppofition to whatever is hafty, ſtiff, and pert;
than which nothing can be, in my opinion, more dif-
guftful and forbidding; and therefore, I take it, that
whatever part of the falute is performed with a ſnatch
or a bounce, as is by fome thought military, is re-
pugnant to my idea of a ſalute; and according to this
my notion, I fhall frame my inſtructions.
.
The ſtanding or front falute, then, is given either
upon addreſſing or receiving a fuperior. In the per-
formance of which the recruit is, at about the diſtance
of fix paces from the perſon to be faluted, to raiſe his
right hand with a gentle motion to his hat, and in ſuch
a manner that he may eaſily take hold of the front
cock, without the leaſt inclination of his head, and
without drawing up his ſhoulders at the ſame time.
The hat is to be held between the thumb and fingers,
and lifted perpendicularly off the head, moving it
then fo far horizontally to the right that no part of
the bole may be over the head ; when he is to let it
and the hand fall gradually down by his fide, turning
the bole inwards to his thigh, and letting it there
remain during the time of the addreſs; after which
let him place it again upon his head with the like gra-
dual motion, as when it was firft taken off. In raiſ-
ing the arm to take off or put on the hat, let the el-
bow be ſquare, and the lower part of the arm kept
level, which will give a graceful angle at the wriſt,
when

32
NEW SYSTEM OF
when the hand has hold of the hat. During the time
of addreſs his countenance is to be preſerved open and
ferene, with a ſteady and manly aſpect, taking care
that his eyes be not then ſo clowniſhly contracted, as
if he were looking at an object that dazzled him ;
nor his looks ſo confuſed, as if there were a conflict
in them between baſhfulneſs and affurance; and, laſtly,
that his body be kept erect, and void of all ſeeming
ſtiffneſs.
ART. III. Of the paſſing Salute.
The paffing or fide falute is given on pafling by a
fuperior, and is performed thus: The hat is to be
taken off and let fall down by the fide, in the ſame
manner as was fhewn in the laſt article, but with this
difference, that it be now taken off with the hand the
moſt diſtant from the perſon to be faluted ; turning
the head at the ſame time, and looking at him with a
cool and reſpectful countenance ; but never with a
ſmile, as that carries with it too great an air of free-
dom, which muſt never be taken or admitted with a
fuperior.
SECT. III. To Stand.
The recruits being make perfect in the foregoing
points, they are next to be drawn up in a ſingle rank,
and fized ; that is, the talleſt are to be on the right,
and the ſhorteſt on the left, decreaſing gradually in
height from right to left. The ſpace which each
man is to occupy, is to be one pace, or two feet and
an half; that is, the diſtance from the centre of one
man's body, to that of the next to him, is to meaſure
fo

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
33
ſo much. This point being fettled, which will be bet-
ter explained farther on, the Corporal is then to pro-
ceed according to the following directions.
ART. I. Of ſtanding erect.
The keeping of the body erect is acquired by a
knowledge of particular principles, contributing to
the appearance, eaſe, and ſtrength of the man ; and
for which purpoſes the following rules are to be op-
ſerved.
The body of the man is to be kept firm and up-
right, but not in a ſtiff or conſtrained poſture. His
face is to be truly erect, fo as neither to recline back-
ward, or to incline forward ; there being in either
poſition an equal awkwardneſs, and that which will
affect the due ballance of the body. His view, or vi-
fual direction, is to be horizontal, except when he
ſhall have occaſion to look fideways, or at an object
below him; and even then without altering the erec-
tion of his face. His ſhoulders are to fall eaſy from
his neck, and to be preffed or thrown a little back,
in order to bring his breaſt or cheſt the more forward.
Each arm is to hang eaſy down by his fide, with the
palm of each hand turned inwards, and placed on the
outſide half-front of his thigh. And his knees are
to be kept ſtiff and firm under himn, in order to ſup-
port the better the weight of his body, and to prevent
any inclination of it.
Note, This attitude is called ſtanding in proper or-
der; either when a Soldier is with or without his
arms, the ſmall difference between either being the
poſition of the hands.
E
ART.
3

34
NEW SYSTEM OF
ART. II. Of planting the Feet.
The planting of the feet confifts in placing them at a
proper diftance from each other, and in ſuch a man-
ner as can beſt ſuſtain the weight of the body and keep
it erect. To effect which this maxim is to be obſerv-
ed : That “ every object ſtands the weaker by how
6 much its baſe is leſs than its greateſt diameter."
Now, the baſe of a man is his feet, and his greateſt
diameter the breadth of his ſhoulders; therefore ſhould
his feet be placed fo near to each other, as to occupy
a leſs ſpace than the breadth of his ſhoulders, he muſt
conſequently ſtand ſo much the weaker, or not ſo
firm as if they had been placed at a more convenient
diſtance.
Now, in order to aſcertain that point of diſtance,
I ſhall ſhow on what principle I limit the ſpace of
ground upon which a man is to ſtand ; and for which
purpoſe let it be firſt obſerved, that the weight of a
man's body, when he ſtands, reſts upon an arch which
is called his fork; and that the piers of that arch, if
I I may fo call them, are his thighs and legs. Now, as
no independent obje&t can ſuſtain itſelf out of the line
“ of gravity,” it therefore follows, that every inde-
pendent object is beſt ſupported by a perpendicular
bearing; therefore as a man's thighs and legs are the
piers, or columns, which ſupport the arch that ſuf-
tains the weight of his body, conſequently thoſe co-
lumns ought to ftand perpendicular, and be parallel
to each other. Hence it is, that when a man hap-
pens to ſtand out of this direction, by having his feet
placed either too near or too far afunder, he will
quickly find himſelf to ſtand uneafy and infirm; be-
cauſe
06

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
35
cauſe the weight of his body has not then a perpendi-
cular bearing, which ſtrains the parts when out of
that direction; therefore, as a perpendicular bearing
is of courſe the firmeft pofture, let the diſtance then
be meaſured from the centre of one thigh bone to that
of the other, juſt below the fork of a middle fized
man, which will be found to be about ten inches ;
and let that diſtance be laid from the centre of one
ankle to that of the other, holding the feet parallel to
each other at the ſame time, and then the heels will
be found to be placed by that means at the diſtance of
about ſeven inches afunder; and on the toes being
again properly turned out, as will be ſhown farther
on, the diſtance then, from out to out of the toes,
will likewiſe be found to be nearly equal to the breadth
of his ſhoulders, or the greateſt diameter of his body,
And hence I deduce this general rule, viz. That the
heels be placed, when a man ſtands erect, at the diſtance
of ſeven inches afunder.
SECT. IV. To Face,
To Face, means no more but to turn the body
from its original poſition, either to the right or to
the left, as occaſion may require. But in order to
have a clear idea of this operation, and to compre-
hend the better how it is to be performed, I ſhall
ſuppoſe a man, ſtanding in proper order, to be placed
continually within a circle ; and the centre of that
circle to be the heel or point upon which he faces,
turns, or revolves. Again, I ſhall ſuppoſe this cir-
cle, or whole revolution, to be divided into four equal
parts; each part making a quadrant, or a fourth part
E 2
of

36
MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
of a circle ; and that two of thoſe quadrants make a
ſemicircle, or the half of the whole circle,
Now when a man is ordered to face, or to turn to
the right or to the left, this word of command means
no more, but that he ſhould perform only the revo-
lution of a quadrant from the place where he laſt
ſtood; but when he is ordered to face to the right,
or to the left about, the addition of the word about,
fignifies, that he is then to perform the revolution of
a ſemicircle, as will be exemplified, in the following
words of command.
I. Face to the right. One Motion. .
Direction.
At which he is, with a ſpring, to fall back briſk-
ly with his right foot, making h's left heel the centre
point upon which his body is to turn, and to come
fo far to the right as to deſcribe a quadrant, or to
make a full face to the place where his right hand
had been, before he faced. In this operation, he
is to preſerve entire the true attitude of his body. His
arms are to have no ſwing with them; his body is to
be kept upright; his heels at their proper diſtance;
his toes to be well turned out; and the whole is to be
formed with ſuch immediate exactneſs and dexterity,
as to have no ſeeming amendment on coming to his
new ſtation.
II. Face to the right. One Motion.
Direction.
This operation is performed in the fame manner,
and with the ſame addreſs and attention as the laſt;
which

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
37
which both together will conſtitute the revolution of
a femicircle, and will then cauſe a full face to the
rear, his back being now to the front.
Ill. Face to the right about. One Motion.
Direction.
This operation is to be performed in the fame way
as the other two, but with this difference, that as
the turn of the body is now to deſcribe a femicircle,
the greater ſpring and agility is of courſe required to
effect it,
IV. Face to the left. One Motion.
Direction.
Note, In all facings to the left, their operations
are juſt performed in the ſame manner as thoſe to
the right, with difference only of fituation, ſtill mak-
ing the left heel the centre of motion ; and therefore
this word of command requires no more action but
to make a full face to the left, ſo as to deſcribe a
quadrant with the turn of the body, bringing up the
right foot at the ſame time.
V. Face to the left. One Motion.
Direction.
Make alſo another revolution of a quadrant, which
will occaſion a full face to the rear.
a
IV, Face

38
NEW SYSTEM OF
VI. Face to the left about. One Motion,
Dire&tion.
a
Now perform the revolution of a ſemicircle, which
will cauſe a full face to the front.
Why I make the left heel in all the above facings,
and in all facings whatever, the centre of motion,
preferable to the right, is for this reafon; that, as
the generality of men are right-handed, greater
ſtrength and agility lie of courſe in the right ſide
than in the left : And as all the above facings
require agility, and conſequently ſtrength to per-
form them, therefore the neceflity for having the
force of motion to come from the ſtrongeſt fide,
in order to bring the body the better about; but
were the right heel to be made the centre of motion
inſtead of the left, the right ſide would by that means
be then confined, and conſequently the force of mo-
tion would be the more feeble, it coming from the left,
which is the weaker ſide of the two; for in all the
above revolutions, the ſtronger the motion or ſpring,
the firmer the body will turn. There is indeed ano-
ther reaſon, and, in my opinion, a weighty one,
for making the left heel, on all Facings, the centre
of motion; it ſerves to prevent the miſtakes, that
always happen, when different heels are uſed for the
ſame purpoſe. And why I make each facing to be
performed at one ſingle motion on one heel, inſtead
of three motions on two heels, is for this obvious
reaſon; that it faves ſo much the more time, and
withal the operation being in itſelf to the full as well
performed, as there are now no ſwords worn, which
frequently cauſed an interruption, and made it ne-
ceſſary

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
39
ceſſary to perform a fingle Facing at three motions in-
ſtead of one.
SECT. V. To March.
Marching conſiſts in teaching a Soldier, firſt, how
to balance his body in the carriage of his perfon ;
next, how to ground well his foot; and, laſtly, how
to limit his ſtep. It likewiſe teaches him an equality
of pace, or a ſameneſs of motion with others in the
fame rank with himſelf; and to time and meaſure his
pace with thoſe who either lead or go before him, in
order to preſerve a proper diſtance and a ſtraight rank.
Theſe are the ſeveral requiſites which conſtitute
good marching ; and to acquire which, is, I may
venture to ſay, one of the moſt difficult parts of the
Exerciſe, the beſt precepts availing but little without
conſtant practice. But as tkill and expertneſs in every
ſcience muſt firſt be obtained by inſtruction, I ſhall
therefore give the following directions.
ART. I. To Balance the Body.
The Balance of the Body depends intirely upon a
proper poſition of the knee and foot. With reſpect to
the firſt, let it be obſerved, that as in ſtanding both
feet fupport the body at once, ſo in marching only
one foot can at a time perforn that office, each foot
being alternately upon the ground. Now as the keep-
ing of the knee ſtiff and firm, in order to ſtrengthen
the limb for the better fupport of the body, was
Thewn to be neceffary in the firſt inſtance, it follows,
that it muſt be to the full, if not more fo, in the
preſent, as each knee is now burdened with double
the weight that it ſuſtained when ſtanding. Therefore
the rule which I ſhall offer for this purpoſe, is,
That

40
NEW SYSTEM OF
That the knee of each foot as it ſteps, as well as that of
each foot which is grounded, be kept ſtiff and firm.
The neceſſity for the knee to be kept thus ftiff is e-
vident from obfervation ; that when a man walks with
bended knees he always walks feeble and uneven,
and, confequently, ungraceful and hobling, and more
liable to be thrown down at every ſtumble or joftle.
Thus much then concerning the knee, and now
with reſpect to the proper poſition of the foot. To ſet-
tle this point, the firſt thing to be conſidered is the of
fice of the foot when grounded; which, upon a little
reflection, will be found to conſiſt in affording an
outſide, as well as a front aid to the body, by keep-
ing it erect, and by preventing it from falling fide-
ways or forward.
Hence then that poſition of the
foot, which equally participates of both aids, is un-
doubtedly the moſt proper, as any defect in either
muft evidently affect a due Balance of the Body. To
find out then that point at which to place the foot, let
it be obſerved, that the angle contained in the ſweep
made by the toe from fide to front, making the heel
the centre, is equal to ninety degrees, and the half of
that angle is forty-five, or the half of a quadrant.
Now let the toe be turned out to that middle point,
and then the foot will have its true poſition for ſup-
porting the body, either in ſtanding or marching. It
will be further neceffary to make the recruit practice
for ſome time to ſtand alternately upon each foot,
which will give him a better command of his Balance,
and will cauſe him to walk more even and ſteady.
ART. II. To Ground the Foot.
In regard to the Grounding of the Foot, which is
another material point, care muſt be taken that it al-
ways
a

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
41
ways moves parallel to the ſurface of the ground over
which it ſteps, which will occafion it to ground all at
once, and be the means of making the body to move
firm and even in walking, otherwiſe ſhould either the
heel or the toe be firſt grounded, it will cauſe an
hobling and infirm movement, becauſe the Foot, by
being ſo grounded, acquires two motions inſtead of
one, and, confequently, fuch motions can neither be
ſo ſtrong and ſmooth, as if only one was made by the
foot being at once placed upon the ground.
ART. III. To Limit the Step.
As to the length, or meaſure of each ftep, no rule
can well be laid down for it, becauſe men of different
fizes neceffarily and commonly ſtep "different lengths,
and becauſe the flower a man walks the ſhorter will be
his ſtep, and the quicker the longer; therefore the
length of the ſtep muſt be adjuſted to the occaſion,
and to the make and ſize of the man; but however,
this may be recommended, that it be not fo ſhort as
to make him appear fribbliſh, nor ſo long as to appear
clowniſh ; fince, in the firſt inſtance it will cauſe an
ugly wriggling effeminate motion, and, in the latter,
an aukward projection of the body.
Note, A common pace is two feet and a half,
though a fized man ſeldom gains that diſtance at each
ſtep in moderate walking.
ART. IV. To preſerve Equality of Pace.
Equality of Pace conſiſts not only in preſerving an
even motion and rate of marching with all thofe in
the fame rank, but in keeping at a proper diſtance
F:
from

42
NEW SYSTEM OF
from all thoſe who lead or go before ; and in order
to arrive at a proper degree of perfection in theſe
points, the four following propofitions with their ex-
planations are ſtrictly to be attended to.
PRO P. I.
If all the men in the ſame rank do not ſtep together with
a like foot, they will continually joſtle and incommode
each other.
Explanation.
To demonſtrate the neceſſity for all the men in the
fame rank to ſtep together with a like foot, that is,
with the right or with the left at the ſame time, it will
be
proper firſt to ſhew the natural affection and bearing
of the body in walking.
It may be obſerved, that as each foot is alternately
upon the ground, the body will always incline to that
fide on which the foot is grounded, in order to have
a perpendicular bearing on that foot for its ſupport.
Hence the motion of the body from fide to ſide as a
man walks, and hence the neceffity that when two or
more men ſtand cloſe to each other in the ſame rank,
and are to march or walk at an equal rate or pace,
they do ftep with a like foot, in order that their bodies
may all at once incline to the right or to the left, or
move parallel with each other; and that each man
may, by that means, have the more room for his beár-
ing and marching uninterrupted; but were they to
ftep with different feet, the cafe would be otherwiſe ;
they would then, by the oppoſite inclination of their
bodies, and by the want of fufficient room to maintain
a proper bearing, be continually joftling and incom-
moding each other.
Beſides

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
43
Beſides the advantage reſulting from this method
of marching with a like foot, there are two others no
leſs momentary, which conſiſt not only in the beauty
and gracefulneſs of a rank, or diviſion of men obſerv-
ing that movenient, but in accuftoming them betimes
to a unity of action; a principle which ought ever to
be maintained and inculcated, and never departed
from.
Note, All marches, whether to the front or to the
rear, are to be begun with the left foot. Whence
the reaſon I know not; though moſt men, eſpecially
the right-handed, were they not informed of the con-
trary, would firſt ſtep off with the right foot; but
as it is a matter very immaterial in itſelf, whether a
man begins his march with his right or his left foot,
provided all the men in the ſame rank ſtep together
with a like foot; and as it has been a long eſtabliſhed
rule to begin always the march with the left foot, an
alteration is of little conſequence, and therefore I ſhall
leave the point as I find it: but all marches by files,
whether to the right or to the left, are to be begun with
the foot next the front, becauſe it is the moſt conſpi-
cuous, and neareſt to view.
PRO P. II.
If one man's ſtep is longer or ſhorter than another's, in
the ſame rank with himſelf, it will occaſion him to be
either too far advanced, or too much retired, and con-
it fequently will make the rank to appear uneven in that
part.
ei
Explanation.
1
As
among a number of men fome will naturally ftep
longer
F 2
8

44
NEW SYSTEM OF
longer or ſhorter than others, this incquality can no
otherwiſe be remedied, or made leſs difcernible, than
by a ſtrict attention of the men chemſelves to each o-
ther, and that of thoſe who are to ſuperintend them:
but in order that each man may the ſooner diſcover
whether his ſteps differ from others, or others from
himſelf, the application of the following maxim will
immediately inform him.
If an object is ſo placed as to be in a line with two
others, the whole will then be in one and the ſame di-
rection.
Now, if a man is placed in a direction or line with
two or more men, whether they be on his right or on
his left, and all do ſtand alike erect, it is evident that
the man next him will obſtruct his view of him who
is more remote ; and this being reciprocally the caſe
with reſpect to others, the rule then will be,
That as ſoon as ever a man ſhall diſcover by his own
movement but juſt the beginning appearance of the few
cond or third man from him, whether in rank or in file,
he do inſtantly regulate his motions, so as to deprive
himſelf of that view.
The application of the above maxim is extremely
uſeful and requiſite in the adjuſting of all arrangements
and directions of whatever extent, whether of files,
tracing out an encampment, or forming a line of
battle, &c. for if two objects are erected or given, a
third can eaſily be placed in a line with them.
PRO P. III.
If all the men in the ſame rank do not march in a
parallel direction with each other, they will occafion the
rank, when it comes to halt, to be either to open or too
much cloſed.
Expla-

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
45
Explanation.
This propoſition is made evident by this maxim ;
" That if right lines are not parallel, they will either
converge or diverge." But to prevent the irregula-
rity here pointed at, requires the greateſt nicety
and judgment; becauſe a man muſt keep, not only
in a parallel direction with thoſe on his right and on
his left, but he muſt keep the line, or direction of
his march perpendicular to the line of his rank, that he
may the better preſerve, in this laſt inſtance, the
ground of his diviſion or battalion, and prevent its
inclining too much to the right, or too much to the
left. Now a fingle man may, with tolerable exactneſs,
effect this by fixing his eye upon two objects in his front,
which are in a line with himſelf, and perpendicular
or nearly fo to his rank; and then to keep them, as he
marches towards them, conſtantly ſhut, or ſeemingly
united, ſo as to prevent their opening to his view.
But for a number of men, in the ſame rank, to do
this is next to an impoffibilty ; becauſe of the vaſt im-
probability that the different objects, which each man
pitches upon for his own direction, are parellel with
thoſe of other men, or are perpendicular to the line
of his rank; and ſhould thoſe different directions be
not parallel to each other, they muſt of courſe either
converge or diverge.
Hence the cauſe of the frequent openings and
cloſings of a diviſion or battalion, when it marches
from its ground. But as this irregularity will be lefs
conſpicuous by the error of one man, than that of
many, I would therefore rather have a rank, diviſion,
or battalion, to be conducted by one careful man
only,
a

46
NEW SYSTEM OF
only, than permit each man to be his own guide ;
and for which purpoſe, I would have ſuch man or
guide, to be placed at the centre of the front rank;
in order, that all thoſe on his right and left, by his
being not more remote from them, may the eaſier
dreſs and move with him; and then all, but the guide
himſelf, will have nothing more to attend to, but to
preſerve a ſtrait rank, and to keep at a due diſtance
from each other.
PRO P. IV.
If the ſeveral ſucceeding diviſions are too near, or
too far aſunder, this irregularity will cauſe the batta-
lion, when it is formed, to appear in thoſe parts, top
open, or too much cloſed.
Explanation.
To prevent the ſeveral diviſions from being too
near, or too far aſunder, will chiefly depend upon
the judgment of the flank men of each diviſion, in
determining by obſervation the diſtance which their
reſpective diviſions ſhould be at from the leading di-
viſion to them: To effect which, I ſhall give the
following rule:
That the diſtance from the front rank of the leading
diviſion, to that of the next ſucceeding diviſion, be
equal to the extent of the front rank of that ſucceed-
ing diviſion.
Why I give the preference to the flank men in de-
termining the diſtance of the diviſions from each other
is, becauſe they can better judge of the extent of their
reſpective

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
47
reſpective rank, than thoſe who are at or near the
centre of it.
It may now be aſked, firſt, Whether a body of
men can all ftep together, with like feet, upon fer-
vice, or in time of action ? And next, if they can-
not, wherefore then the neceſſity for that infinite
pain and trouble, in making them practice fo difficult
a point?
To the firſt queſtion I anſwer, that they cannot
well obſerve it, on account of the great variety of
ground they always muſt meet with, which frequent-
ly obſtructs and obliges them to change their ſteps;
and above all, on account of the various incidents
and circumſtances of time and place, which muſt di-
vert their attention to more active and ſerious mat-
ters; and therefore, the points only ſought after, on
this occafion, are, the preſervation of ſtrait ranks,
and due diſtances in them.
And to the next queſtion, I likewiſe anſwer, that
the advantages reſulting from the practice of the
foregoing rules, more than repays the pain and trou-
ble of obliging men to ſtep together, as it not only
accuftoms them to a unity of action, but it gives to the
man himſelf, whether alone, or in a rank with
others, not only a graceful and manly appearance,
from which he never after thoroughly de-
part, but it gives a reputation to the fervice, by
thewing the degree of attention given to the difci-
pline of it.
can
ART. V. Of marching by Files.
The word File, is an unlimited term, compre-
hending any number of men drawn up in a direct line
behind

48
NEW
SYSTEM OF
behind each other; as a rank, on the other hand.
includes any number drawn up beſide each other;
whether, in either reſpect, they be at clofe or at open
order. And he, who is placed in the front of any
File, is called the File-leader, or the man who is to
cover all thoſe directly in the rear of him, and by
whom they are to be guided in their movements.
Having thus defined the point on which I am to
proceed, and as I ſhall take occafion farther on to
make ſome obſervations on this article, and on the
application of it, I ſhall here only touch upon the
manner of its operation, and the neceſſary fteps pre-
paratory to it.
Let the rank then of recruits be told off or divided,
for the firſt time, into three parts or divifions. The
firſt, or right-hand diviſion, is to form the front
rank; the ſecond, or centre diviſion, is to make the
rear rank; and the third, or left-hand divifion, is to
be the centre rank.
Each rank is to be drawn up at four paces, or ten
feet diſtance from the other; that is, the centre rank
is to be four paces diſtant from the front rank; and
the rear rank, to be the ſame diſtance from the cen-
tre; and this I call whole diſtance.
Each front rank man now becomes the File- leader
to thoſe men of the other two ranks, directly in his
rear, whom he is to cover ; and in ſuch a manner,
that the line of the File may ſtand at right angles with
the line of the rank, or ſo, that if an indifferent per-
fon was placed in the front in the fame File line of di-
rection continued, he could not poſſibly ſee the men
of the rear ranks, his view being interrupted by him
of the front rank. To effect which, the Corporal is
to begin on the right, making the right-hand man of
cach

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
49
each rank to compoſe the firſt or right File, or ſo as
to make thoſe men of the centre and rear ranks to
ſtand directly behind him of the front rank: then the
ſecond man of each rank is likewiſe to make the fe-
cond File; and ſo on from right to left till all the
Files are compleated.
But as it often happens, that out of the number
of men preſent three equal ranks or diviſions cannot
be truly formed, but that there will remain, after
ſuch diviſion is made, one or two odd men; then
ſuch odd men are to be diſtributed in the following
manner: If only one man, the front rank in prefer-
ence is to have him ; but ſhould there be two odd
men, then the front rank is to have one, and the rear
rank the other. The intent of which is, that no o-
pening may appear in thoſe places; eſpecially in the
front rank, as that is ever, and on all occafions, to
be kept intire and compact.
The Files being thus completed, and the odd men
ſo diſpoſed of, the Corporal is then to proceed and
give the following words of command.
I. By Files, Face to the Right. One Motion.
Direction.
See Chap. II. Sect. IV. Word of Command I.
Note; Now it is to be obſerved, that before the
men had faced, that which was then a Rank is now
become an intire File; as each man ſtands behind, or
is in the rear of him who leads or is before him.
And on the other hand, that that which was at firſt a
File is now a Rank, as fuch men now ſtand beſide
G
each

50
NEW SYSTEM OF
each other, and according to the depth they had been
originally drawn up at; and in this light, the whole
is now to conſider themſelves.
II. March.
Direction.
The whole is to ftep off together, and to begin the
March with the foot next the front. In marching,
each man is carefully to maintain his limited diſtance
from thoſe who go before and are beſide him ; and in
order that he may the better preſerve a ſtraight line
both in his rank and file, he is never to let himſelf fee
the ſecond or third man from him.
III. Halt.
Dire&tion.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, placing their feet fquarc
and in proper order.
IV. Front.
Direction.
The whole is to face to the Front upon the left
heel, bringing up the right foot to proper order.
V. By Files Face to the Left. One Motion.
Direction.
See Chap. II. Sect. IV, Word of Command IV.
VI.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
51
VI. March.
Direction.
See the ſecond Word of Command of this article.
VII. Halt.
Direction.
$
See the third Word of Command of this article.
10
VIII. Front. One Motion.
N
Direction.
The whole is to face to the Front upon the left
heel, falling back with the right foot to proper order.
ART. VI. Of Oblique Marching,
When a place or ſtation to which your
diviſion is
to march ſtands not directly before you, but obliquely
from you, in front, either towards your right or to-
wards your left; then, inſtead of approaching it by
the tedious and ſquare method of right-angled march-
ing, and the wheelings ſuitable to that form, you
are, by a ſhorter way and in a more expeditious man-
ner, to advance to it in the oblique direction it hap-
pens to bear from you; and this is called oblique
marching. To accompliſh which, there are two ways
to perform it; and either is chofen, as the place
happens to be nearer or farther from you ; and for
inſtance,
Suppoſe
1
G 2

52
NEW SYSTEM OF
Suppoſe you are to draw up in Line, on the right
of a diviſion or body of men juſt directly before
you.
To effect which, inſtead of ſtepping directly forward
with the right foot, the man is to ſtep obliquely for-
ward to the right; and on his ſtepping next with his
left foot, he is to ground it directly before his right
heel, and ſo on alternately, till the diftance required
is obtained. And on the other hand, ſhould the di-
vifion be directed to march obliquely to the left; then
the left foot is likewiſe to ſtep forward to the left,
placing at the next ſtep the right foot directly before
the left heel, and ſo on in reciprocal ſucceſſion. As
to the degree of obliquity of each flep, there can be
no fixed rule laid down for it, fince that muſt be de-
termined according as the place you are to move to
ſtands more or leſs obliquely from you ; but a ţittle
practice will ſoon bring men to regulate their ſteps
ſuitable to the occafion.
But when the place to which you are to go hap-
pens to be at fome confiderable diſtance from you,
then you are to make at firſt ſo much of a wheel as
will bring the front of your diviſion to ſtand at right
angles with the direction of the object to which you
are to advance; and afterwards nothing more will re-
main, but for the diviſion to make again juſt ſo much
of another ſhort wheel the contrary way when it ar-
rives at the place of its deſtination, which will bring
it parallel to the line it is to join or fall into.
SECT
VI. To Wheel.
Wheeling is a ſpecies of Facing ; the latter reſpecting
individuals; the former a body of men drawn up, ei-
ther in a fingle rank, or in a diviſion compoſed of ſe-
veral

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
53
veral ranks; cach having for its 'revolution the famo
diviſions of the circle as the other, and confequently
the ſame number of words of command; but inſtead
of ſaying, as in the Facings, face to the right, &c.
you are to ſay in the Wheelings, Diviſion, wheel to
the right, &c. See Sect. IV. of this Chapter,
ART. I. To Wheel by ſingle Rank.
.
In Wheeling by fingle rank, the whole rank re-
volves on the flank point it wheels on, like the ſweep
of a pair of compaffes with one leg fixed, or like a
door or a gate turning upon its hinge ; 'that is, if the
rank wheels to the right, it revolves on the right heel
of the man who is on the right of the fame rank,
and likewiſe the contrary. Hence it is evident, that
the nearer any man is to the heel on which the rank
wheels, the leſs will be the ſpace which he deſcribes
in his revolution; and of courſe his ſteps muft accord-
ingly be longer or ſhorter, as that ſpace is nearer or
farther from the heel or point on which he wheels; in
order that he may by that means make the requiſite re-
volution at the ſame juncture with all thoſe in the
fame rank with him. This being, underſtood, no o-
ther intimation will then be neceſſary, but to preſerve
a ſtraight rank, and to oblige the men to ſtep toge-
ther, and to keep at a due diſtanse, ſo as only juſt to
touch or feel each other with their right hands, which
will be ſufficient to prevent their flying out or cloſing
too near to each other.
This rule differs a little from the preſent practice,
by which the men are directed to incline to the flank
they wheel on, or to keep cloſe ſhoulder to ſhoulder,
in order to bring each other the better about. But
this

54
NEW SYSTEM OF
this method I diſapprove, having obſerved, that it
not only always occaſions a crowded rank, by mak-
ing the men to cloſe too much, but it beſides cauſes
the intervals between the diviſions to be too open
when the line comes to be formed..
ART. II. To wheel by ranks in Diviſion.
As the men have been in the laſt article formed
into a fingle rank, they are now to be formed into a
body conſiſting of three ranks; and in order to
which, the ſingle rank, in which they are at preſent,
is to be told off in three diviſions, as is directed in
Sect. V. Art. V. of this chapter. But that this ope-
ration may be performed in a more methodical or
military way, the centre and left diviſions, are firſt
to countermarch, or to change ground with each
other; and then the whole is to be formed into three
ranks, according to the following words of com-
mand.
1. Left and centre Diviſions, face to the Right
and Left.
Direction.
The centre diviſion is to face to the left upon the
left heel, bringing up the right foot; and the left di-
vifion is to face to the right upon the fame heel, fal-
ling back with the right foot.
II. March

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
55
II. March.
Direction.
Each diviſion is to ſtep off with the foot next to
the front, and to march ſtrait forward ; the centre
diviſion marching in the front of that on the left.
III. Halt.
Direction.
This word of command is to be given on the divi.
fions having arrived at each others former ground;
and in order that each man may then place himſelf
at his due diſtance from him who leads or goes
before.
IV. Front.
Direction.
The new centre diviſion, as it now ftands, is to
face to the Left on the left heel, bringing up the right
foot; and the new left diviſion is to face to the
right on the left heel, falling back with the right
foot; and then the whole is to dreſs as a rank-intire.
V. To the right wheel, and form your Ranks.
March.
Direction.
Each of the three diviſions is as they now ſtand,
in fingle rank, to wheel a quadrant, which will bring
them

56
NEW SYSTEM OF
them parallel to each other; beyond which ground,
the men are not to advance, though they are to
continue the ſtep motion with their feet, till they are
ordered to halt.
VI. Halt.
DireEtion.
The whole three ranks, viz. the Front, Centre,
and Rear, are to ſtand faſt; planting their feet at
proper diſtances, and in a line with each other.
VII. Rear ranks, take whole diſtance. March.
Direction.
The diſtance that the ranks are to be from each
other, being previouſly marked out; as is directed in
Sect. V. Art. V. of this chapter; the men of the
rear ranks are to march to that ground, or rather
to be formed upon it. Then the files are to be com-
pleted, and the ranks dreffed, directing each man to
obſerve and remember well his file leader, and his
right and left hand men; that in caſe they ſhould
afterwards be broke or diſperfed, they might the more
readily form of themſelves, by cach man knowing
his ſtation, and falling at once into his proper place.
VIII. Rear ranks cloſe to half diſtance. March.
Direction.
The centre rank is to march two paces, and the
rear rank four; each rank ſtepping off at the ſame
time with the left feet.
IX. Rear

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
57
IX. Rear ranks cloſe to quarter diſtance.
March.
Direction.
The centre rank is to march one pace, and the
rear rank two ; which is called cloſe order.
The men being thus formed into cloſe order, and
made to wheel, the whole body may then be com-
pared to a ſolid parallelogram, or to a book, re-
volving upon one of its front angles, which by its
folidity, brings round with it all its fides and angles,
according to the figure it is in. Now, as the wheel-
ing of a diviſion or a body of men, conſiſting of
two or more ranks, differs in nothing from the
wheeling of a fingle rank, but in the bringing
round of its rear ranks with it; and as the rear
ranks cannot revolve on a point, as the front rank
does, conſequently the men of thoſe ranks muſt occa-
fionally incline to the right or to the left, in order
to preſerve their figure, and to maintain the true di-
rection of their reſpective files; that is, if the diviſion
wheel to the right, the men of the rear ranks incline
to the left; and if it ſhould wheel to the left, they
likewiſe incline to the right, in order to come about,
in either inſtance, with the men of the front rank;
and according to their figure, in a cloſe and compact
form and order: but as a diviſion has often occaſion to
wheel as well upon one of its rear angles as its front,
the corporal is for that purpoſe, and after he has made
his men perfect in wheeling upon each of the front
angles, to order the diviſion to the right about, and
then perfect it likewiſe in wheeling upon each of the
rear angles, or he may perfect the whole as well or
H
rather

58
NE W SYSTEM OF
rather better, by making each rear rank alternately,
a front rank,
ART. III.
To wheel in time.
When a battalion is marching by diviſions in co-
lumn, and there fhould be occafion to form the line
at once, nothing is then more unfightly, or proclaims
more the want of proper inſtruction, than to ſee the
feveral diviſions wheel ſo irregular, as not to ſhut in,
or come up all at once to their ground.
To avoid ſo unbecoming an appearance, no other
rule is requiſite, but a ſtrict attention in each ſuc-
ceeding divifion to its leading diviſion, ſo as to keep
at a due diſtance from it, and to time well its wheel
with it.
С НАР.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
59
CH A P.
III.
TO
The Duty of the Serjeant.
SECT. I. Inſtructions.
1. HE fame caution which I have given the Cor-
poral, I ſhall here again repeat to the Ser-
jeant, viz. That he make perfect as he proceeds; and
in order to which he muſt not only dwell long on the
ſame thing, but make it his conſtant buſineſs to recur
frequently to it.
II. Upon having the recruits delivered over to him
from the corporal, ſhould he, on examination, find
any of them imperfect in thoſe points of the exerciſ
which the corporal had charge to inſtruct them in, he
is then not only to remand ſuch recruit to the corporal
for the better information, but he is to make a report
of that defect to his commanding officer; and this he
is to do in his own defence, for ſhould he connive at
ſuch a proceeding, the diſcovery of the fault, and the
cenſure ariſing from it, will not then be levied at the
corporal, but at himſelf, it being his duty to ſuperin-
tend and report ſuch matters.
III. He is to have a corporal under him as an affift-
ant, who is, according to the different words of com-
mand, to perform the feveral motions of the exerciſe
for the better direction and imitation of the recruits.
IV. He is to divide the time of exerciſe into fuch
portions as will not over-fatigue the recruits by their
being kept too long under arms.
V. He is to be very ſtrict in having himſelf punctu-
ally obeyed, and upon all occafions to appear ſo jea-
lous of his own conſequence, as not to ſuffer the leaſt
freedom
H 2

60
NEW SYSTEM OF
freedom to be takon with him by thoſe under his com-
mand.
VI. He is to draw up his recruits in a ſingle rank,
placing them according to their different heights in
fucceffion from right to left : viz. the talleſt on the
right, the ſhorteſt on the left. See Chap. II. Sect.
III.
And when they come afterwards to be drawn up
three deep, the ſame rule for fizing the men in the
different ranks is likewiſe to be obſerved, viz. the
talleſt men in the front rank; the next talleſt in the
rear rank; and the thorteſt in the centre. See Chap.
II. Sect. IV. Art. II.
There are three effential reaſons for thus fizing the
men in the different ranks.
The firſt is, for appear-
ance fake, as it makes the men of each rank to ſeem
all of an equal height. The next is, that by placing
the talleſt men in the front rank, thoſe in the rear,
being of a leſs height, may the better be covered
from the fire of the enemy.
And the laſt is, that by
having thoſe of the next greater fize in the rear rank,
they may there, with more convenience and leſs ob-
ſtruction, deliver their fire over thoſe of a leſs height
in the centre rank, as theſe laſt do over the front
rank when it kneels.
This method of fizing the men in the different
ranks is certainly the beſt for the good appearance of
a ſingle company, when not joined or connected with
other companies, but it evidently makes a battalion
appear to great diſadvantage, for as the ſhorteſt man
of each rank is by this means placed on the left of the
fame, and there joined to the talleſt in that of the
next company to him, the difference of height then
between thoſe two men is frequently fo great, as to
make a very viſible and diſagreeable appearance. To
prevent

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
60
then appear
prevent which, I would recommend to have the talleſt
man of each rank in every company placed on the
right of its centre; the next talleſt to him on his left;
and the next in turn on his right, and ſo on alternate-
ly from right to left, till the rank be compleated : by
which means, no ſtriking difference of height will
between the right-hand man of one com-
pany, and the left-hand man in the ſame rank of the
adjoining company to him; and conſequently as the
different heights of the men are thus concealed, each
rank of the battalion will then appear as if all the men
were of an equal height.
VII. In drawing up the Recruits, he is to give or
allow to each man the ſpace or room of two feet and
an half, or one pace; that is, that the diſtance from
the centre of one man's body to that of the next to
him
may
meaſure ſo much.
Why I make choice of this diftance, preferable to
any other, is for the following reaſons ; firſt, becaufe
the generality of men do mcaſure about two feet from
outfide to outſide of both arms, when the hands hang
eaſy down by the body; and next to make an allow-
ance for the projection of the pouch, and for the
fweep or circle which the body will defcribe, when it
Thas occafion to turn to the right or to the left, which
will require at leaſt fix inches more room, otherwiſe
the men will, for want of it, eternally juſtle and in-
commode each other in their revolutions.
VIII. In drawing up the Recruits, he is, if he can
contrive it, to place them in ſuch a fituation, that the
fun or wind may be upon either flank; by which
means, they, as well as himſelf, will be the better en-
abled to obſerve each other.
IX.

62
NEW SYSTEM OF
IX. He is every morning, previous to the time of
exerciſe, to examine well the ſtate and condition of
the arms and accoutrements of each Recruit; to the
intent, that whatever is out of order may be im imedi-
ately repaired and adjuſted, and that nothing may im.
pede the exerciſe, or obſtruct the buſineſs of the day:
and this examination is the more requiſite, as it accuf-
toms young Soldiers betimes to a proper care and at-
tention of thoſe articles.
X. He is likewiſe to ſee that each Recruit be pro-
perly and well drefled, that the ſeveral ſpecies of his
cloathing be clean and well put on, and that nothing
is wanting and out of repair.
XI. He is to ſee that the Accoutrements be proper-
ly put on and worn; that is, that each pouch do hang
on the right ſide of the body, and placed fo conveni-
ent, that whatever is wanted out of it may be eaſily
come at, otherwiſe ſhould the pouch hang too high,
too low, or too far behind, it will occafion an awk.
ward twiſting or motion of the body to come at the
contents: and he is withal to take particular care that
all the pouches of the ſame rank do hang at equal
heights, and in like places, which will give a pleaſing
appearance of uniformity to the whole Rank.
XII. He is alfo to obferve that the Bayonet-belt
be well wore ; that is, that it be buckled round the
waiſt, and above the hips, and, in particular, that
the Bayonet does hang well and convenient, and
nearly perpendicular, fo that the handle may be
placed between the left hip and centre of the body;
and in ſuch a manner that the point of it may juſt ap-
pear without the left thigh, by which means the Re-
cruit will neither be obſtructed by the handle when he
ſtoops or leans forward, nor will he be interrupted by
the

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
63
the ſticking out of the point when he comes occaſion-
ally to turn himſelf.
XIII. He is next to make the Recruits to ſtand in
proper order, as is ſhewn in Chap. II. Sect. III.
Art. I.
XIV. He is then to ſhow them how to ſhoulder their
Firelocks, or to carry well their arms, and in order to
which, the Firelock is to be placed upon the left
ſhoulder, and held at the extremity of the but in the
palm of the left hand ; ſo that the hand may be un-
der the but, and the tops of the fingers appear on the
infide, while the thumb remains on the outfide, ex-
tended in a line with the edge of the but-plate: the
upper part of the guard is to come fo low as to be
placed a little under the left breaſt: the firelock is to
reſt upon that part of the hollow of the ſhoulder, be-
tween the tip and the upper part of the breaſt, where
it is to be held very firm againſt the body, and ſo as
not to croſs the direction of it; the right arm is to
hang at the ſame time in an eaſy and natural poſture
down by the fide, ſo that if it was put in motion like a
pendulum, it would ſeek reft in no other poſition.
Why I prefer this poſition of the Firelock to any o-
ther is for the following reaſons. Firſt, that it affords
to the Soldier a greater degree of eaſe, becauſe it
leaves the upper part of the left arm in a ſtate ofreſt by
its hanging perpendicular, and by that means it is bet-
ter enabled to ſupport the weight of the Firelock, and
to keep it more ſteady upon the ſhoulder than it could
poffibly do were it to hang.in any other direction.
Next, that by the Firelock being held as above, it not
only acquires a good reft upon the thoulder, which of
courſe fupports it the firmer; but the barrel receives
by it ſuch a fufficient ſlope, as not only to prevent it
ftom
a
a

64
NEW SYSTEM OF
from eaſily falling off, which it would be apt to do
were it held more perpendicular, but from annoying
thoſe in the rear were it more floped.
XV. He is next to take his poſt of Exerciſe, at
a convenient diſtance in the front of his recruits, and
oppofite to their centre, placing himfelf in ſuch a fi-
tuation, that his diſtance from either flank may be
equal to the extent of the rank of recruits, which
will defcribe an equilateral triangle.
Why I pitch upon this diſtance for the poſt of
Exerciſe, is for this reaſon. It is obſerved, that the
greateſt diſtinct view, which we can have of any ex-
tenſive object, parallel to our own poſition, is compre-
hended under an angle of fixty degrees, therefore,
if the poſt of Exerciſe, was nearer than the above
diſtance, the angle of obſervation muſt be ſo mucli
the greater, which would prevent both flanks from
being conveniently embraced at one view: and if the
diſtance was greater, though it would more facilitate
and perfect the view, by the angle being lefs, yet it
would cauſe a greater exertion of the voice, which
may not be ſo convenient, beſides the awkwardneſs
of being at a greater diſtance than neceſſary. On theſe
confiderations, I have limited the poſt of Exerciſe,
which will be fufficient for any front, not exceeding
the extent of a battalion, either for cbfervation, or
for the advantage of a tolerable good voice.
XVI. He is next to ſettle and limit the duration
of time to be obſerved between each motion of the
exerciſe ; in the doing of which, two points muſt be
guarded againſt, which are extremes in themſelves,
the one is, that the time be not ſo ſhort, as to oc-
caſion confufion and inaccuracy in the motions by too
great

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
65
great a hurry; and the other is, that it be not fo
long as to cauſe irregularity by a miſcomputation of
it in different minds.
From a conſideration of thoſe two extremes, will
ariſe the neceſſity for that rule or medium which may
prevent the firſt, and correct the laſt: The rule then,
which I ſhall offer, is no other, but that already pre-
fcribed by General Bland, viz. That the Space between
each motion, be about a ſecond of time, or while a
man can diftin&tly count to himſelf, one, two.
This time will be found to be a ſufficient pauſe
to diſtinguiſh well each motion and its performance,
which is all that is wanted in the firſt inſtance, and
by its being ſo thort, it will fo effectually leflen and
conceal any irregularity in the laſt, ariſing from a
misjudgement of time, as to give the appearance of
unanimity to each motion, and not only this, but a
Atill greater advantage will accrue, which is, that it
will help to accuſtom the men betimes to briſkneſs
and difpach, the ſoul of action, and conſequently it
will teach them to explode whatever is tedious, dila-
tory and unneceſſary.
XVII. The Serjeant having preſcribed the time
which is to be obſerved between each motion, he is
then to give directions, that each motion be perform-
ed with vivacity and correctneſs, but in ſuch a man-
ner as to be void of every buffooniſh flouriſh and
gefticulation, which may render it to common ſenſe,
or to a judicious eye, a matter of ridicule.
XVIII. He is next to appoint a poſt or ſtation
for his corporal; for which purpoſe, he is to place him
occaſionally oppoſite to the extreme of either flank,
and in that point of view where each recruit may eafi-
I
ly

66
NEW SYSTEM OF
or
ly obſerve and ſee him, and where he himſelf
may
have an eye upon him in order to direct him as he
Thall think fit.
XIX. He is to provide himſelf with a cane
ſtick, which he is to carry in his hand as an emblem
of his authority; and in order that it may ſerve to
affift him in fhewing his men by it, how to perform
the feveral motions of the exerciſe.
XX. Matters being thus prepared, he is then to
order a profound filence and attention, and to give
the following words of command in a deliberate and
diſtinct tone of voice, laying the emphaſis as much
as poſſible, upon the laſt word, and withal he is to
let his inſtructions be clear and articulate, and deliver-
ed according to the directions annexed to each word
of command,
SECT. II. The Parade Exerciſe.
I. Take Care.
Direction.
At this precaution the Serjeant is to fee, that a
profound filence be inſtantly obſerved by all the re-
cruits, that their attention be fixed, which they are
to fignify by immediately turning their faces to the
corporal, whoſe motions and attitudes are to ſerve
them for their guide and imitation.
II, Recover

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
67
II. Recover your Firelocks. Two Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion,
Seize the Firelock with the right hand juſt under
the guard, ſo as that the fore-finger does touch it,
and turn up the lock briſkly at the ſame time with
the left hand, without altering the direction of the
barrel.
Second Motion.
Raiſe the firelock off the left ſhoulder with the
right hand, and, without inclining or moving the
head, quit the but-end with the left hand, and bring
the firelock round to the right fide with a rapid mo-
tion, turning the barrel inwards to the body, and
then ſeize it inſtantly with the left hand above the
lock, ſo that the little finger may nearly touch the
hammer ſpring, letting the thumb lie pointed up-
wards, cloſe to the barrel along the ſtock; the bar-
rel is to be held perpendicular, and ſo high, that
the lower part of the left arm may be kept level
and parallel to the body, and of an equal height with
the neck, and in ſuch a manner, that the chin may
juſt appear above it; the upper part of the right arm
is alſo to be kept level, and no part of the firelock is to
touch the body.
By the recover being thus made on the right ſide,
it affords a conſiderable advantage to the man, and
I 2
in

68
NEW SYSTEM OF
in ſo much, that it enables him to ſee clearly whatever
is before him, which could not poflibly be the cafe
were the recover to be made in a direct oppoſition to
his face.
III. Reft your Firelocks. One Motion.
Direction.
Bring the firelock briſkly down with both hands,
finking it ſo low, that the cock might be a little
higher than the right hip, or that it may be held in
ſuch a poſition, as will admit the lower part of the
left arm to remain level: On bringing the firelock
down, the right toe is to be turned out at the ſame
time, an half more than it was before, and without
altering the due front of the body, placing withal,
the right thumb upon the cock, and the fore-finger
upon the trigger. From the cock downwards, the
firelock is to be held firm againſt the body and right
thigh, which will give the barrel a ſmall outward
flope. The muzzle is to be held directly to the
front, and without inclining either to the right or to
the left; and the left thumb is to be held firm againſt
the ſtock, as directed in the ſecond motion of the laſt
word of command, pointing upwards, and in a line
with it.
This attitude is intended for a poſture of defence,
and differs but little from that of preſented arms, as
will be ſhewn farther on.
IV. Order

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
69
IV. Order your Firelocks. Three Motions,
Direction,
Firſt Motion.
Bring the firelock to the right fide of the body
with a briſk motion, and without finking it ; let the
upper part of the barrel come againſt the hallow of
the fhoulder, flipping up the left hand at the ſame
time along the ſtock, as high as the tip of the ſhoul-
der, and then ſeize the firelock with it, and hold
the barrel in that poſition firm and perpendicular.
Second Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and fink it
with the left, as far as it will go on the right ſide,
without bringing it in on the body, ſeizing the firelock
at the ſame time with the right hand near the muzzle,
ſo that the top of the thumb, may be as high as the
end of the ſtock, and extended along the outſide of
it, cloſe to the barrel.
Third Motion,
Quit the firelock with the left hand, letting that
hand fall eaſily down by the left fide, and at the ſame
time turn in the right toe to its former place, and
plant the butt with a briſk motion upon the ground,
cloſe on the outſide of the right foot, and in a line
with both toes, holding the barrel perpendicular, and
the ſtock to the front.
V. Ground

70
NEW SYSTEM OF
V. Ground your Firelocks. Four Motions,
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Turn firſt the barrel briſkly to you with the right
hand, and at the ſame time turn the right toe ſo as to
place it behind the butt and cloſe to it, letting the bo-
dy withal make an half-face to the right.
Second Motion.
Slip down the right hand along the firelock as far
as it will go without inclining the body, and ſtep out
at the ſame time a moderate pace with the left foot ;
bend the left knee, and lay the firelock with the lock
uppermoſt upon the ground, placing the infide of
the right knee upon the lock, and the barrel pointing
directly to the front; in doing of which the face is to
be kept erect, in crder the better to obſerve the mo-
tion of the guide or the corporal, letting withal the
left hand hang eaſy down by the left thigh.
Third Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand; bring up the
left foot to its former ground and ſtand upright, mak-
ing an half-face with the body to the right; both
hands are to hang eafy down, only that the right is
to be kept open with the fingers diftended, and the
palm to the front.
Fourth

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
71
Fourth Motion.
Turn in the right toe over the butt 'to its former
pofition; and turn in alfo, at the ſame time, the
palm of the right hand to the thigh, and make withal
a full front with the body.
The grounding of arms is an operation, to which,
in one inſtance, I am by no means reconciled; I
mean the uſe it is applied to on guard; for if the
weather is dry, it cracks and ſpoils the ſtocks, and if
it be damp it ruſts the barrels and locks; and what is
ſtill of greater conſequence, if a guard happens to be
kept in a difaffected place, the arms being thus impru-
dently laid out and expoſed, afford the moſt conveni-
ent opportunity that can be wiſhed for to a few m
properly armed, to feize upon the whole, and convert
them to whatever uſes they ſhall think fit; and hence
my reaſon for wiſhing that the practice of grounding
the firelocks upon guard was totally rejected and abol-
iſhed.
a
VI. Toke up your Firelocks. Four Motions.
Note, As the performance of this operation, with
that of the two following words of command, is only
the reverſe of what went before, but the motions the
fame, I ſhall therefore be the lefs particular in my di-
rections, a reference being duly fufficient for the pur-
poſe
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Place the right toe, as before, cloſe behind the
butt, and turn out alſo the paim of the right hand,
making

72
NEW SYSTEM OF
making withal an half-face to the right at the fame
time.
Second Motion.
Step out with the left foot, bend the left knee, and
let the left hand hang eafy down by the left thigh ; lay
the right knee upon the lock, and take hold of the
firelock with the right hand a little above the laſt
rammer pipe.
Third Motion
Riſe briſkly with the firelock, ſtep back with the
left foot to its former poſition, ſtand erect, and make
an half-face to the right at the ſame time.
Fourth Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and with a
quick motion ſeize it again with the ſame hand near
the muzzle ; turn in the right toe to the inſide of the
butt, make a full front with your body, and hold the
barrel perpendicular.
a
VII. Reft your Firelocks. Three Motions,
Direetion,
Firſt Motion.
Slip down the right hand along the barrel, as far as
it will go, without inclining your body, and there hold
the firelock between the thumb and fore-finger, the
thumb being inwards, and each pointing downwards
along the ſtock.
Second

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
13
Second Motion.
Raiſe the firelock with the right hand fo high, that
the cock may be a little higher than the hip, and
ſeize the firelock with the left at the ſame time, a
little above the hammer ſpring.
Third Motion,
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and ſeize
it with the fame clofe under the guard, placing the
thumb upon the cock, and the forefinger upon the
trigger.
VIII. Shoulder your Firelocks. Two Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Quit the firelock with the left hand, and with
the right bring it round to the left ſide, with a rapid
motion, placing the butt-end at the ſame inſtant, in
the palm of the left hand, with the firelock upon the
left ſhoulder, in a proper poſition.
(See Sect. I.
Inſtruction XIV of this Chapter.) In bringing the
firelock round to the left, the right toe is to be turn-
ed into its proper pofition, the right thumb and fore-
finger are to be taken off the cock and trigger, giv-
ing the firelock at the ſame time, ſuch a turn in the
right hand, as that the barrel may be brought to the
front, letting the thumb be pointed upwards upon
the ſcrew plate oppoſite the lock.
K
Second

74
NEW SYSTEM OF
Second Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and let it
fall eaſily down by the right ſide.
IX. Secure your Firelocks. Three Motions, .
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Seize the firelock with the right hand at the
fcutcheon plate; ſo that the fore finger may touch
the lower part of the guard, letting the nuckles be
to the front, with the thumb placed upright on the
inſide of the ſtock.
The firelock is in that manner
to be held firm to the body, and without altering in
the leaſt the pofition of it.
Second Motion.
Quit the butt with the left hand, and ſeize the
firelock at the ſame time, with the ſame hand, at the
tip of the left ſhoulder, ſo as that the little finger
may juſt touch the top of the ſhoulder; the nuckles
are to be placed in the front, and the thumb ex-
tended on the outſide along the ſtock, and cloſe to
the barrel.
Third Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and turn the
butt, at the ſame inftant, with a quick motion of the
left hand under the left arm, letting the muzzle drop
forward

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
75
forward, which will occaſion the barrel to be un-
derneath, or the rammer to be uppermoft: the right
hand is to hang eaſy down by the right fide; the
upper part of the left arm, is to be kept in a perpen-
dicular direction ; and the firelock is to reſt a little
upon the left hip, where it is to be preſſed cloſe
to the ſide by the arm, and held firm to the body.
X. Shoulder your Firelocks.
Firelocks. Three Motions,
Note. This operation being exactly the ſame in all
its motions, as that of the laſt word of command, on-
ly being reverſely performed, I ſhall therefore be the
leſs preciſe in my direction, as a reference will be fuf-
ficient for the purpoſe.
Direction
Firſt Motion,
Bring up the firelock with the left hand, and
place it as before upon the left ſhoulder; and at the
fame time feize it with the right hand at the ſcutcheon
plate.
Second Motion,
Quit the firelock with the left hand, and inftantly
after feize it with the ſame hand under the butt,
Third Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, letting
it fall briſkly down by the right ſide.
XI, Fix
K 2

76
NEW SYSTEM OF
XI. Fix your Bayonets. Seven Motions.
Direction.
Firſt and Second Motions,
Handle the firelock as is directed in the firſt and
fecond motions of the ninth word of command.
Third Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and let
it fall down in the left hand as far as it will go
on the left ſide, turning the thumb inwards, and
the barrel downwards, at the ſame time; make with-
al an half face to the left, on the left heel, and feize
the firelock at that inſtant with the right hand at the
end of the ſtock near the muzzle, ſo as that the
thumb may bear againſt the end of the ſtock at the
inſide, while the fingers are placed on the outſide;
the left arm is to hang perpendicular; the barrel is to
be held firm againſt the left thigh; and without let-
ting it incline either to the right or to the left, the
lower part of the right arm is to be kept level, ſo
as to make a right angle with the upper part, which
will determine the ſlope of the barrel, and the diſtance
of the muzzle from the face: and in order to make
the requiſite half face to the left, the left toe is to
be turned about an half more to the left; bringing
up at the ſame time the right foot and to place it
ſo as to make it ſtand at right angles with the left,
letting the right heel be oppoſite to the centre of the
left foot; and at the diſtance of about ſeven inches
from it.
Fourth

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
77
Fourth Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and with it
ſeize the handle of the bayonet, ſo that the thumb
may be placed upon the fhank of it.
Fifth Motion,
Draw the bayonet with a quick motion, and place
the ſocket of it, directly over the muzzle of the
firelock, holding the blade in a direction with the
barrel.
Sixth Motion.
Enter the muzzle into the focket of the bayonet,
ſo that the fight upon the end of the barrel, may
freely enter the grove of the ſocket; then thruſt down
the bayonet upon it, and turn the blade to the left,
and afterwards give the bayonet another thruſt down-
wards to fix it.
Seventh Motion.
Quit the handle of the bayonet with the right hand,
and ſeize the firelock with it, as above directed in
the third motion, at the end of the ſtock near the
muzzle.
XII. Shoulder

78
NEW SYSTEM OF
XII. Shoulder
your
Firelocks. Three Motions,
DireEtion.
Firſt Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand; fall back
with the right foot to a full front, and turn the left
toe to its former poſition. Place the firetock at the
ſame time upon the left ſhoulder with the left hand.
and ſeize the firelock with the right hand at the
fcutcheon plate, as is directed in the firſt motion of
the tenth word of command.
Second and Third Motions.
See the ſecond and third motions of the tenth
word of command.
XIII. Preſent your Arms. Three Motions.
Direction.
Note, The performance of this operation, is ex-
actly the ſame as that directed in the ſecond and third
words of command, but with this ſmall difference,
that the right thumb is not to be placed upon
the
cock, nor the fore-finger upon the trigger; this at-
titude being intended for nothing more than the cerem
remony or form of a falute,
a
XIV. Face

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
79
XIV. Face to the Right. Three Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Bring up the firelock to the poſition of a recover,
as is directed in the ſecond motion of the ſecond word
of command, turning in the right toe to its former
poſition at the ſame time.
Second Motion.
Turn to the right upon the left heel, with a ſpring
or briſk motion of the body, ſo as to make a full
face to the right, placing the right foot as before at
its proper diſtance from the left.
Third Motion
Bring down the firelock with both hands to the at-
titude of preſent your arms, as is directed in the laſt
word of command.
XV. Face to the Right. Three Motions.
.
Direction.
Note, This operation is performed in the ſame
way as that of the laſt word of command.
XVI, Face

80
NEW SYSTEM OF
XVI. Face to the Right about. Three Motions.
Direction.
Note, This operation is exactly the ſame as that
of the laſt, but with this ſmall difference, that as a
femicircle is now to be deſcribed, a greater ſpring of
the body, is the more requiſite to perform it.
XVII. Face to the Left. Three Motions.
Direction.
Note, This with the two following words of com-
mand, differ no ways in their operations from the
three preceding ones, but in this, that the right foot
is now to be brought up, inſtead of falling back with
it as before; the revolution to the left, upon the
left heel, and the diviſions of the circle being equal-
ly the ſame, and therefore require no further di-
rections.
XVIII. Face to the Left. Three Motions.
XIX. Face to the Left about. Three Motions.
Why I prefer the above method of Facing upon
I
one heel, to that of performing it upon both heels,
as is now practiſed, is for this reaſon, that when
ſwords were in uſe with the infantry, the obſtructions
which they always occafioned in the above revolu-
tions, by the points ſticking out from the mens fides,
frequently incommoded the men of the fame rank fo
much

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
81
much, as to cauſe them to joftle and interrupt each
other, which often removed them from the centre
point of their revolution, and of courſe altered their
due diſtances from one another; and therefore it was
then held neceffary, in order to remedy and avoid
thofe inconveniencies, to oblige each man to per-
form his revolutions upon both heels at once, as being
a more firm poſition, though in the doing of which,
a greater number of motions ſhould be neceſſary,
and conſequently would take up more time, than if
the revolutions were fimply to be performed upon
one heel; but fwords being now laid afide, and as a
man can turn ſufficiently firm and ſteady upon one
heel, by the ſpring or velocity of his revolution, I
therefore chooſe, as well for the ſake of ſaving time,
as to avoid every unneceſſary motion, to adopt the
former method of turning or facing upon one heel,
inſtead of performing it now upon both, as is now
practiſed,
XX. Shoulder
your
Firelocks. Two Motions.
Direction.
See the eighth word of command.
XXI. Charge your Bayonets.
Three Motions.
Direction.
Firſt and Second Motions.
Come to a recover as is directed in the ſecond word
of command.
L
Third

82
NEW SYSTEM OF
Third Motion.
Spring back with the right foot, placing the cena
tre of it cloſe behind the heel of the left; turn the
left toe at the ſame time directly to the front, ſo that
each foot may, in that poſition, ftand at right angles
with the other, or formed like the letter T; quit
the firelock with the right hand at the ſame inſtant,
giving it ſuch a turn in the left without finking it,
that the muzzle may fall directly forward, and that
the firelock may thep reft upon the left elbow, and
be in a line with the lower part of that arm, and
withal ſeize the end of the butt in the palm of the
right hand, ſo that the tops of the fingers may appear
on the outſide, while the thumb is placed on the in-
fide and pointed upwards; the man is to look for-
wards, and to keep his face full to the front ; thc
barrel is to lie level, and the firelock is
to bc
held breaſt high, and ſupported between the fore-
finger and thumb of the left hand, which are to be
pointed towards the butt, along each fide of the ſtock,
fo that the end of the fore finger may come almoft
cloſe to the hammer ſpring.
XXII. Puſh your Bayonets. Two Motions.
Direction.
Firft Motion.
Look well to the front, puſh briſkly forward the
firelock with both hands, ſtepping out with the left
foot,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
83
foot, and placing at the ſame time the end of the
butt againſt the left breaſt; the barrel is to be kept le-
vel in the puſh, and the ſtep is to be the length of a
pace, or two feet and a half, that the Soldier may
afterwards the more eaſily, and with greater command
recover himſelf. In this poſition, the left knee is to
be a little bent, in order to bring the body more for-
ward, and that the puſh may annoy at a greater
diſtance, keeping withal the right knee firm and
ſtraight, to the intent of fortifying the body againſt
any repulſive force the bayonet may meet with,
a
Second Motion,
Bring home the firelock to a charge, ſtepping back
with the left foot to its former poſition.
Note, This laſt motion does more properly belong
to the following word of command, but it is here in-
troduced in order to prevent a violence of pain to the
left arm, which it would otherwiſe occaſion, were it
for ſo long a while diſtended, as the ſpace of time
common between two words of command.
XXIII. Recover your Bayonets. One Motion
Dire&tion.
Quit the butt-end with the right hand, and at that
inftant ſeize the firelock with the ſame hand at the
fcutcheon plate, bring up the right foot, and com-
ing to a recover as before.
L2
XXIV. Shoulder

84
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXIV. Shoulder your Firelocks. Two Motions, .
Direflion.
See the eighth word of command.
XXV. Advance your Firelocks. Three Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Seize the firelock with the right hand, as is direct-
ed in the firſt motion of the ninth word of command.
Second Motion.
Quit the butt end with the left hand, and at that
inſtant lay hold of the cock with the ſame hand, in
ſuch a manner, that the little finger may be placed
under it, and cloſe to the breech, letting the cock be
held faſt in the hand.
Third Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, and then
let the firelock fall directly down by the left ſide, as
far as it will go in the left hand.
The advantage of this poſition is in my opinion,
conſiderably preferable to our preſent method of hold-
ing the firelock in the right hand, and for the fol-
lowing reaſons. Firſt, that by its being held in the
left

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
85
3.
left hand, the right, which in general, is the moſt
active, is left at liberty, and muſt therefore be more
graceful, as well as more advantageous to the man
himſelf. Next, it gives no fort of uneaſineſs in car-
rying it, becauſe the man's arm hang ſtraight and per-
pendicular, and therefore more capable of bearing
the weight of the firelock; ncr are his fingers in this
poſition ſo much crampt as in the other, by the
conſtrained aukwardneſs of holding it.
I prefer this poſition for a particular uſe and conve-
nience, when the line is ordered to adyance and
charge, which I ſhall explain farther on.
And laſtly,
XXVI. Shoulder your Firelocks. Three
Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Raiſe the firelock with the left hand, ſo high upon
the left ſhoulder, as to place the upper part of the
guard under the left breaſt, and then feize it with the
right hand, as is directed in the firſt motion of the
ninth word of command.
Second and Third Motions.
See the ſecond and third motions of the tenth word
of command.
XXVII. Return

86
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXVII. Return your Bayonets. Six Motions,
Direction.
Firſt, Second, and Third Motions,
See the firſt, ſecond, and third motions of the
eleventh word of command.
Fourth Motion.
Strike up the bayonet under the fhank with a
quick motion of the right hand, ſo as to clear the
fight from the groove it lies in; then turn the bayonet
to the right, and flip it off the muzzle, holding the
blade perpendicular, and letting the upper part of the
handle be as high as the muzzle, and a little to thc
right of it, and in a line with it.
a
Fifth Motion.
Enter the point of the bayonet into the fcabbard,
and thruſt it home.
Sixth Motion.
Quit the handle of the bayonet, and then ſeize the
firelock at the end of the ſtock near the muzzle, as
is directed in the ſeventh motion of the eleventh
word of command.
XXVIII. Shoulder

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
87
XXVIII. Shoulder your Firelocks. Three
Motions.
Direction.
See the twelfth word of command.
XXIX. Support your Firelocks. Three
Motions.
Direction,
Firſt Motion.
Seize the firelock with the right hand, as is direct-
ed in the firſt motion of the ninth word of com-
mand.
Second Motion,
Quit the butt end with the left hand, and place
the centre of the lower part of the left arm directly
under the cock, ſo that the cock may reſt upon it;
in this poſition the firelock is to be held firm to the
body by the left arm, and without altering the flope
of the barrel.
Third Motion.
Quit the firelock with the right hand, letting the
hand fall down by the right ſide.
XXX. Handle

88
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXX. Handle your Firelocks. Three Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Seize the firelock with the right hand, as is directed
in the firſt motion of the ninth word of command.
Second and Third Motions.
Handle the firelock as is directed in the ſecond and
third motions of the tenth word of command.
Sec T. III. The Field Exerciſe.
Take Care to Prime and Load.
AT this Precaution, the Serjeant is to ſee that his
men, who are ſtill to remain drawn up in a ſingle
rank, do carry well their arms, that they ſtand in
pro-
per order, and at equal diſtances from each other; and
that their bodies be kept upright, their faces erect,
and their attention well fixed.
As there is no one part of the exerciſe of
greater
moment than that of properly priming and loading,
ſo there is none that requires more true care and ex-
actneſs ; and though this is univerſally admitted, yet
it-too often happens, that through too great a ſolici-
tude of making ſoldiers appear expert and quick in
this performance, they are rather taught to repreſent
the thing than to do it well. This being but too much
the practice, it is therefore no uncommon circum-
ſtance to obſerve when ſoldiers are loading, that by the
hurry

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
89
а
hurry and inaccuracy of their motions, a conſiderable
part of the powder is either ſpilt, or ſo badly emptied
out of the cartridge, as either to weaken the proper
force of the charge, or to prevent it from taking fire :
beſides which, there is that of ramming down the car-
tridge, which is too frequently performed in ſo ſlight
a manner, that the cartridge is either left to ſtick in
the barrel at fome diſtance from the chamber, or to
lie fo looſe and unſettled at the bottom of it, that the
reſiſtance given to the exploſion of the firſt powder
that takes fire is ſo very ſmall, that a great part of the
remaining powder is blown out of the barrel, before
it can be conſumed in fire. The ill conſequence of
which need not be pointed out, it being ſo evident in
itſelf, and ſo eaſily comprehended ; but the advantage
arifing from the cartridge being well rammed home is
in nothing ſo demonftrable, as in that of a ſcrew-barrel
gun, when the ball being well confined, or fimilarly
well rammed home, though its charge of powder is
not in quantity the tenth of what is contained in a
common cartridge, yet it ſhall throw its ball to the
full as far as any firelock can with a full charge, and
for no other reaſon, but that the whole of the powder
in the ſcrew barrel gun is conſumed in flame before the
delivery of the ball; conſequently as the flight or
force of a ball will always be proportioned to the cir-
cumſtance of emptying well the cartridge, and of ram-
ming it well down, I ſhall therfore direct, that each
motion in priming and loading be performed with the
greateſt accuracy and diſtinctneſs, and without the
leaſt flight, being ſatisfied that one fire, well prepared
and coolly delivered, will do more execution than ten
that are given in hurry and confuſion.
M
I. Advance

୨୪
NEW SYSTEM OF
I. Advance your Firelocks. Three Motions.
See the twenty fifth word of command of the laſt
Section, and the obſervation.
The Field Exerciſe being a repreſentation of what
foldiers are to do in time of action, the above poſition
of the firelock I introduce here as preparatory to it,
and for this reaſon. It has hitherto been a cuſtom,
when ſoldiers come to advance againſt the enemy, to
carry their firelocks ſhouldered, with their bayonets
fixed; by carrying the arms thus elevated, they be-
come of courſe the more expoſed, and more liable to
be damaged by the fire of the enemy. And therefore
it is no
uncommon thing to obſerve, that what
with the ſhot of artillery, and that of ſmall arms, the
part of our arms which is ſo elevated and expoſed is
frequently either broke, or the barrels fo dinted in, as
to be unfit for uſe, which to prevent as much as can
be, is the deſign of the above poſition: and beſides,
there is not only that advantage accruing from it, but
it is a poſition from which a ſoldier can more conve-
niently make ready than from the ſoulder, there being
only one motion, inſtead of three, to effect it.
II. Open your Pans. Three Motions,
Il
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Bring the firelock with the left hand round to the
right fide, to the poſition of a reſt, ſeizing it at the
fcutcheon plate with the right hand, then quit the lock
with the left hand, and with the ſame hand ſeize the
firelock at that inſtant, juft above the hammer ſpring.
This

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
91
This pofition differs only in theſe particulars from the
true reſt, that neither the right thumb is to be upon
the cock, nor the fore finger upon the trigger, nor
the right toe turned out.
Second Motion,
Bring the firelock up to a recover, and then turn
the butt with a quick motion, cloſe up under the right
arm ; quit the firelock with the right hand, and place
at that inſtant the thumb againſt the face of the ham-
mer: in turning the butt under the arm, the left wriſt
is not to be funk or raiſed, which will determine the e-
levation of the muzzle. The left elbow is now to be
kept cloſe to the body, in order to hold the firelock
the firmer, and to ſupport the weight of it the better ;
and the upper part of the right arm is to be preſſed
well againſt the butt to keep it alſo the more firm and
ſteady in its place.
Third Motion,
Throw back the hammer with the right thumb,
which will open the pan, letting the thumb lie on the
outſide edge of the hammer, and in the ſame direction
with it.
HII. Prepare your Cartridges. Three Motions,
Direction,
Firſt Motion
Slap down the right hand upon the pouch with a
quick motion, and take out a cartridge, holding the
top of it between the thumb and forefinger.
Second
M.2

92
NEW SYSTEM OF
Second Motion.
Bring the cartridge with a quick motion up to your
mouth, and bite off the top of it almoſt cloſe to the
powder.
Third Motion.
Bring the cartridge from the mouth to the outſide
of the pan, holding the top of the cartridge well fe-
cured between the thumb and fore finger, and of an
equal height with the pan.
IV. Prime. Two Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Turn up the right hand, and ſhake or empty as
much powder out of the cartridge into the pan as will
little better than half fill it, or as much as will let the
hammer thut clofe down upon it, always remembering
that ſhould there be more powder in the pan than it
will contain, it will hinder the hammer from fhutting
down cloſe upon it, which will expoſe the priming to
any damp or wet that may come near it: and by that
means prevent it from taking fire.
Second Motion.
Secure well the mouth of the cartridge by cloſing it
with the thumb and fore-finger, and placing, at the
ſame time, the three remaining fingers behind the
hammer.
V, Shut

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
93
V. Shut your Pans. Two Motions,
Direction,
Firſt Motion.
Pull down the hammer cloſe upon
the
pan.
Second Motion,
Seize the firelock at the ſcutcheon plate with the
right hand, holding it between the bail of the thumb
and the three diſengaged fingers.
VI. Caft about, to load. Firſt Motion.
Direction.
Fall back with the right foot, and make a full and
proper face to the right; quit the firelock with the
right hand, and turn the muzzle to the rear, letting
the firelock at the ſame time fall down before in the
left hand as far as it can go; and then ſeize it with the
right hand cloſe to the muzzle, holding the barrel be-
tween the middle and fore finger. In this poſition the
firelock is to be held very firm by the left hand againſt
the front of the left thigh, in order to keep the muz-
zle ſteady, and by that means to expedite the loading.
VII, Load with Cartridges, Two Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion,
Turn up the right hand, and empty well the pow-
der out of the cartridge into the barrel.
Second

94
NEW SYSTEM OF
Second Motion.
Thruſt the cartridge caſe after the powder with the
forefinger into the barrel, holding the barrel at the
ſame time between the thumb and middle finger, and
letting the top of the forefinger remain in the muzzle,
VIII. Ram down your Cartridges. Seven
Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Seize the rammer with the right hand, holding it
between the thumb and the middle bone of the
middle finger, ſo that the top of that finger may
point downwards with the rammer; and place at the
fame time the end of the forefinger upon the top of
the rammer.
Second Motion.
Draw out the rammer as far as the arm will ad-
mit, throwing back the firelock at the ſame time with
the left hand, in order that a greater length of
the rammer may then be drawn out, which will fa-
cilitate at the next motion, the drawing it clear out of
the pipes.
Third Motion.
Bring back the firelock to its former place with
the left hand, and quit the rammer at the ſame time
with

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
95
with the right; and ſeize it with the fame hand a
little above the muzzle, holding it as a pen is held,
between the thumb and the two fingers pointing up-
wards.
Fourth Motion.
1
Dart out the rammer from the pipes, giving it at
the ſame time ſuch a turn in the hand, as to place
the top of it againſt your waiſt; flip down the hand
along the rammer, fo low as to be within four inches
of its top, and there hold it firm and parrallel to the
barrel, the thumb pointing upwards.
Fifth Motion
Put the top of the rammer into the barrel, and
thruſt it down as far as the hand will let it go.
Sixth Motion.
Quit the rammer, and ſeize it again towards the
middle of it, thruſting it then down the barrel, as
far as the hand will admit, the thumb ftill pointing
upwards,
Seventh Motion.
Quit the rammer, and ſeize it at the end, holding
it between the thumb and fore finger, and thruſt it
down as far as it can go, and afterwards knock it
hard twice or thrice againſt the end of the cartridge,
by way of ſettling it in the chamber.
IX. Return

96
NEW SYSTEM OF
IX. Return your Rammers. Five Motions.
.
Direction.
Firſt and Second Motions,
Perform theſe motions as directed in the ſecond
and third motions of the laſt word of command.
Third Motion.
Draw the rammer out of the barrel, and turn it fo
in the hand at the ſame time, as to place the end of
it againſt your waiſt, and then hold it parallel to the
barrel; flip down the hand along the rammer, within
twelve inches of the end, or within the diſtance,
that will leave fufficient length for the end of
the rammer to enter the ſecond pipe at the next mo-
tion.
Fourth Motion.
Enter the end of the rammer into the firſt or muz-
zle pipe, and thruſt it down as far as the forefinger
and thumb will admit, but in ſuch a manner, that the
palm of the hand may reſt in the motion upon the
muzzle, with the fingers and thumb pointing down-
wards with the rammer.
Fifth Motion.
Quit the rammer, and place the end of the fore-
finger upon the top of it, holding it underneath, be-
tween the thumb and middle finger, and then thruſt
it home.
X. Advance

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
97
X. Advance your Firelocks. Two Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
a
Face to the left, or bring up the right foot, fo as
to make a full front, and at the ſame inſtant quit the
firelock with the right hand, and with the ſame
hand ſeize it at the ſcutcheon plate, holding then the
firelock in the poſition of a reſt, as directed in the
firſt motion of the ſecond word of command of this
fection.
Second Motion.
Quit the firelock with the left hand, and at the
{ame time bring it briſkly round to the left ſide with
the right hand, and then ſeize it by the cock with
the left, and quit it with the right, as directed in
the third motion of the twenty-fifth word of com-
mand of the laſt ſection.
XI. As front rank make ready. Three Motions.
DireEtion.
Firſt Motion.
Bring the firelock with the left hand round to the
right fide, to the poſition of a reſt, ſeizing it at the
fcutchon-plate with the right hand; then quit the
cock with the left, and with the fame hand, ſeize the
firelock at that inftant; juft above the hammer ſpring,
N
placing

98
NEW SYSTEM OF
placing the right thumb upon the cock, and the fore:
finger upon the trigger. As to what is farther rela-
tive to this poſition of the reſt, ſee the third word of
command of the laſt ſection.
Why I prefer the reſt to the recover, in point of
making ready, is for the following reaſons. Firſt,
becauſe the firelock in that poſition, is more ſheltered
from the fire of the enemy than at the recover. Next,
the weight of it being not ſo burdenſome and painful
to the arms, as it is at the recover. And laſtly, be-
cauſe a ſoldier can cock or half cock his firelock with
far greater eaſe at the reſt, he having then the
whole force of his right hand and arm to effect it,
with the help of having the butt in ſome meaſure fix-
ed or held firm againſt his right thigh, but at the
recover, he can have no ſuch advantage, becauſe the butt
has then no reſting place to refift the force of pulling
back the cock, and becauſe the man's whole purchaſe
is then confined to the ſtrength only of his thumb,
which is rendered more feeble and ineffectual by the
length of the ſpan from the lower part of the guard
to the top of the cock; and hence, it is no uncom-
mon thing to obſerve, that when it is required of 2
ſoldier to cock or half cock at the recover,
him perform it with great ſeeming pain and difficulty.
to fee
Second Motion.
Hold the firelock firm againſt the right thigh with
the left hand; raiſe the right elbow a little, in order
to have the greater purchaſe in pulling back the cock,
then cock or draw back the cock to the catch with
the

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
99
the right thumb, bringing the elbow cloſe down to
the fide at the ſame time.
Third Motion.
Step fo far back with the right foot, that the right
knee, on bringing it down to the ground, may be
placed in a line with the left heel, planting the butt
end of the firelock, at the ſame time upon the ground,
directly oppoſite to the right thigh, and in a line with
the left toe. The right thumb and fore finger are
ſtill to remain upon the cock and trigger. The bar-
rel is to be held perpendicular by the left hand,
which is alſo to continue placed a little above the
hammer-ſpring, and the body is likewiſe to be kept
upright.
XII. Preſent. One Motion.
Direction.
Take the thumb from off the cock, raiſe the firca
lock with both hands, dropping the muzzle to the
front, and placing at the ſame time the butt-end firm
againſt the hollow ſpace between the breaft and right
ſhoulder, In bringing the firelock thus to a preſent,
the left knee is to be turned a little out, in order to
let the body incline forward with more eaſe; which is
intended as well for the convenience of bringing the
right eye to the barrel for taking aim, as for that of
fortifying the body ogainſt the recoil of the firelock
at firing. In preſenting, the object to be fired at, is
to be brought with the eye, in a direct line with the
N 2
upper

Іоо
OF
NEW SYSTEM
upper furface of the breech, and with the top of the
fight at the muzzle; nor is the point to be aimed at
to exceed the height of three feet, or the centre
heighth of a man, in order to make an allowance
for the riſe or depreſſion of the ball in its flight; and
and withal, the left elbow is to be turned down that
the hand may the better ſupport the weight of the
firelock, and of courſe keep it more ſteady.
XIII. Fire. Two Motions. .
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Pull the trigger hard with the fore finger, but not
with a jerk or fudden motion, as that will be apt to
alter the direction of the barrel; the centre bone of
that finger is to be placed againſt the extremity of
the trigger, in order to obtain greater ſtrength and
purchaſe, in raiſing the catch or dog from off the
tumbler, and that the cock in conſequence, may come
the more ſuddenly down.
Second Motion,
Raiſe the muzzle, bring up the right foot to its
former poſition, ſtand erect, and bring the firelock
to a reft.
XIV. Half

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
IOI
XIV. Half cock your Firelocks. Two Motions.
Dire&tion.
Firſt Motion.
Take the forefinger from off the trigger, raiſe
the right elbow, and place the right thumb, at the
ſame time, upon the upper jaw of the cock.
Second Motion.
Pull back the cock to the firſt notch or catch
of the tumbler, as directed in the ſecond motion of
the eleventh word of command, viz. Make ready.
XV. Prime and load. Twenty-five Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Take the thumb from off the cock, holding the
firelock in the right hand at the feutcheon plate; bring
up the firelock with both hands at the ſame time,
and place the butt-end cloſe under the right arm, as
directed in the ſecond motion of the ſecond word of
command of this ſection.
Note, The remaining twenty-four motions of prim-
ing, loading, and of coming to advanced firelocks, are
performed in exactly the ſame manner as directed in
the foregoing words of command of this ſection, viz.
Words

102
NEW SYSTEM OF
Words of command.
Motions,
3
2
2
I.
3. Prepare your Cartridges,
4. Prime,
5 Shut your Pans,
6. Caft about to Load,
7. Load with Cartridge,
8. Ram down your Cartridges,
9. Return your Rammers,
10. Advance your Firelocks,
inn i år in i
2.
7
5
2.
Total
24
XVI. As Centre Rank make ready. Two
Motions.
Direction.
Firſt and Second Motions.
Theſe motions are to be performed in the fame
manner as directed in the firſt and ſecond motions
of the eleventh word of command of this ſection.
XVII. Preſent. One Motion.
Direction.
Take your thumb from off the cock, ſtep forward
,
one pace with the left foot, but a little obliquely to
the left, and at the ſame time drop the barrel to
a preſent, placing the butt-end firm againſt the hollow
between the breaſt and right fhoulder; bend a little
thc

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
103
the left knee, which will occafion the body to incline
forward, and by that means, the eye will come more
conveniently to the fights upon the barrel, for the
purpoſe of taking aim; and laſtly, keep the right knee
firm and ſtiff in order to fortify the body againſt the
secoil of the firelock at firing. As to the other rem
quifites in preſenting, ſee the twelfth word of com-
mand of this ſection.
Note, This being a new attitude or method of
preſenting, the reaſon of which will be omitted here,
and explained farther on, a more convenient
place,
at
XVIII. Fire. Twenty-nine Motions.
Direction.
Firſt Motion.
Perform this operation, as directed in the firſt
motion of the thirteenth word of command of this
fection.
Second Motion.
Raiſe the muzzle, and come down to a reſt, bring-
ing back at the ſame time the left foot to its former
pofition.
Note, The remaining twenty-ſeven motions of
half cocking, priming, loading, and of coming to ad-
vanced firelocks, are to be performed on this, and all
future firings, without any word of command, (ex-
cept when ordered to the contrary) as directed in the
fourteenth and fifteenth words of command of this
fection,

104
NEW SYSTEM OF
fection, taking care withal, that each motion be per
formed by all the men together, at one and the ſame
time.
XIX. As Rear Rank make ready. Two
Motions.
Direction.
Firſt and Second Motions.
This operation is to be performed in exactly the
fame manner as directed in the fixteenth word of com-
mand of this ſection.
XX. Preſent. One Motion,
Direction.
This operation is performed in much the fame
manner as that directed in the preceding ſeventeenth
word of command, but with this ſmall difference,
that inſtead of ſtepping obliquely forward to the left
with the left foot, as there mentioned, on dropping
to the preſent, you are here to ſtep about twelve inches
obliquely back to the right with the right foot, bend-
ing the left knee, and keeping ſtiff the right, for the
fame reaſons as there given.
XXI. Fire

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
105
XXI. Fire. Twenty-nine Motions.
Direction.
Theſe motions are performed in the ſame manner
as directed in the eighteenth word of command of this
ſection, except that inſtead of bringing back the left
foot, as there preſcribed in the ſecond motion, the
right foot is here to be brought up to its former po-
fition on coming down to the reſt, in order to pro-
ceed to half cock, prime, &c.
The recruits being made perfect in all the forego-
ing firings of the different ranks, they are now to be
told off and formed into three ranks, in order that
the whole may then fire together, and according to
the reſpective ranks they ſhall ſtand in ; for which
purpoſe the Serjeant is to proceed as directed in
Chap. II. Sect. VI. Art. II. word of command, firſt,
ſecond, third, fourth, fifth, fixth, ſeventh, eighth,
and ninth -----
Note, When foldiers are thus drawn up in cloſe
order, in order to fire all together, the method of
placing the feet of the centre and rear rank men for
that purpoſe, as directed at the preſent in the ſeven-
teenth and twentieth words of command of this fece
tion, is called locking up.
Caution.
Take care the whole to make ready according to
your reſpective ranks, viz. front as front, centre as
centre, rear as rear.
0
XXII. Make

106
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXII. Make ready.
Direction.
This operation is performed in the ſame manner
as directed in the eleventh, fixteenth, and nineteenth
words of command of this ſection.
XXIII. Preſent.
.
Direction.
See the twelfth, ſeventeenth, and twentieth words
of command of this ſection.
XXIV. Fire.
Direction.
See the thirteenth, eighteenth, and twenty-firf
word of command of this ſection.
When men are thus drawn up in two or more ranks
in order to fire, there are in the execution of which,
two very effential points, which require the niceſt at-
tention, and are of the utmoſt conſequence in them-
felves; namely, that the men neither annoy one ano-
ther by their fire, nor obſtruct each other in taking
proper aim: For theſe important purpoſes there have
been various ſchemes propoſed; but I confeſs, of all
I have as yet feen or heard of, there are none with
which I could be ſatisfied. And to fupport my opi
.
nion,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
107
nion. I ſhall firſt deſcribe our preſent method of lock-
ing up, and obſerve, as I proceed, the diſadvantage
and inconveniencies of that operation, to the end, that
the plan, which I ſhall afterwards offer for a reme-
dy, may the better be comprehended and received,
Our method then is, ſuppoſing the front rank man
kneeling, in order to preſent, he of the centre rank
in the ſame file is directed, firſt to place his left foot
cloſe to the inſide of the former's right foot, and
then to ſtep obliquely back to the right with his right
foot.
By this difpofition it is evident, that the body of
the centre rank man muſt be full an half, if not more,
to the right of him who is kneeling, conſequently,
when he comes to drop his firelock directly before him
to a preſent, the firelock muſt be as much to the
right alſo of him his file leader; now ſhould that
place where the firelock is ſo preſented, be the in-
terval where the platoon officer is pofted, it is like-
wiſe as evident, that he the officer muſt be deprived
half his room by the poſition of the fivelock, which
muft of courſe ftraiten him in his interval, and ren-
der him leſs active in it.---Here then lies one objection
to this method.---And with reſpect to the foldier him-
ſelf, he is no leſs incommoded, but in another man-
ner; for being obliged to place his left foot in the
above pofition, he cannot, as his left leg will then
bear againſt thc rump of his file leader, bend his left
knee, in order to let his body incline forward for the
purpoſe, either of fortifying himſelf againſt the recoil
of his firelock at firing, or for the convenience of bring-
ing his eye with eaſe to the barrel for taking aim.
And hence the reaſon of that extreme aukwardneſs
among
O 2

108
NEW SYSTEM OF
among the generality of foldiers, when the come to
take aim, by inclining their heads cloſe down to the
tip of their right fhoulders, which would otherwiſe
be avoided, and the thing better done, were the left
kree to be bent at the time. See the ſeventeenth word
of command of this ſection. Here is alſo another ob-
jection :
As to the rear rank man of the ſame file, his fi-
tuation is to the full as inconvenient as that af him of
the centre rank, if not more fo; for being, by this
means, obliged to place alſo his left foot on the in-
fide of the right foot of him before him, and to ſtep
obliquely back with his right foot alſo, his body muſt
of courſe be likewiſe an half, if not more,
to the
right of him before him, ſo that when he alſo comes
to preſent, the whole ſpace or interval of the platoon
officer is evidently occupied, or taken up, by the
firelocks of the centre and rear rank men, therefore,
as the platoon officer is, by this means, totally exclud-
ed the room of his interval, he finds himſelf obliged,
in order to avoid the annoyance of the fire, either to
direct the rear rank man on his left, not to fire at all
or to fall back on the platoon on his right, to ſhelter
himſelf; either then of theſe circumſtances muſt be
allowed to be very improper, and yet by our me-
thod there is no remedy for it; and as this is always
the caſe, even at exerciſe, how much greater muſt the
embarraſſment be in time of action, by having added
to it the hurry and confufion which men are then fre-
quently in ; or ſhould ſoldiers happen to engage the ene-
my by night, or in a thick fog, the danger will be great-
er of their not ſeeing their officer, and of courſe the
conſequence may be fatal to him, and of which I have
heard

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
109
Here again is
heard of ſome melancholy inſtances.
another weighty objection to our preſent method.----
And with regard to the rear rank man himſelf, he
alſo finds when he comes to preſent, his left arm,
which ſupports and holds ſteady his firelock, ſo much
incommoded by the right elbow of the man before
him, as to prevent him from taking any fixed or cer-
tain aim; beſides the further obſtruction he receives
from the fame man, who hinders him from leaning
his body forward for the purpoſe of taking an eaſy
and ready aim. Here then is likewiſe another great
objection.
And to add ſtill more to the impropriety of this
our preſent method, there is that of the rear ranks
being obliged at locking up, to quit the ground of
their reſpective files, by each man placing himſelf to
the right of his immediate file leader, as above ſhewn,
by which means, when they have fired, they muſt
either ſhuffle back again to their former ground, or
remain expoſed to the fire of the enemy, while they
are going on with their priming and loading. As to
the operation of fhuffling back again to their former
ground, it is truly ridiculous and unfightly. And as
to that of their remaining unneceſſarily expoſed to
the fire of the enemy, while they are thus priming
and loading, it is abſolutely erroneous, and contrary
to principle, becauſe no man ought to be expoſed,
where there is no occafion. Here is alſo another
ſtriking objection.
To obviate then and remove theſe ſeveral objec-
tions, is the intent of my preſent ſcheme, which is
as follows:- Firſt, the ranks are to be cloſed to quar-
ter diſtance, as is directed in Chap. II. Sect. VI.
Art

I10
NEW SYSTEM OF
a
Art II. word of command IX. Then the whole is to
make ready, preſent, and fire, as directed in the threc
laſt words of command of this section. By that me-
thod it may be obſerved, that the man of the cen-
tre rank receives no obſtructions whatever from him
of the front, as he ſteps with his left foot a little ob-
liquely forward to the left of him, nor can he in the
leaſt incommode the platoon officer with his firelock
at the preſent, becauſe it is directly over the right ſide
of his file leaders head, who is kneeling. And with
regard to the rear rank man of the ſame file, he can
never claſh or interfere with him of the centre rank,
becauſe they preſent in oppoſite inclinations of their
bodies; that is, he of the centre ſteps forward
a little obliquely to the left with his left foot, while he
of the rear fteps ftill a little more obliquely backward
to the right, with his right foot, by which means
they ſtand quite clear of each other; nor can this
fame man incommode, in the leaſt, the platoon offi-
cer, with his firelock at the preſent, becauſe it is
placed almoſt over the outfide of the right ſhoulder
of his file leader, who is kneeling in the front rank.
And laſtly, it may be obſerved, that by this difpo-
ſition made of the centre and rear rank rnen in locking
up, they never quit the ground of their reſpectivo
file, as they do by our preſent method, becauſe each
man always keeps one foot fixed, which enables thoſe
men, on having fired, to bring the oblique feet the
more readily to their former ground; and by that means
to place themſelves at once in the due direction of
their reſpective files; and of courſe under the imme-
diate cover of their file leader, while they are going
on with their priming and loading. But to return,
After

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
III
After the recruits have been inſtructed, as above
directed, to fire ſtanding, they are next to be taught
how to fire-advancing and retreating; and in order
to which, they are to be divided into two
platoons, as their number will admit, and then each
platoon made to fire ſeparately, and diſtinctly from
the other, and according to the following directions.
or more
Caution.
Take care to fire advancing,
XXV. March.
Direction.
The whole are to ſtep off, beginning the march
with the left feet.
XXVI. Right Hand Platoon make ready.
Direction.
This operation is to be performed by each rank of
the platoon, as directed in the eleventh, fixteenth,
and nineteenth words of command of this ſection, but
with this fmall difference, that upon cocking, the
platoon to fire is to advance beyond the other, by
taking three large ſteps, and with a quicker movement
than ordinary, beginning with the left foot; and then
the front rank is to kneel, and the other two ranks
are

II2
NEW SYSTEM OF
are to lock up, obſerving their proper diſtances from
cach cther.
The intent of making the firing platoon to advance
thus before the fuſtaining platoon, is for the follow-
ing reaſons. Firſt, that it may the better deliver its
fire clear of any obſtructions which it might receive
from the other: and before it comes up to join it in
the line. Next, that the fuftaining platoon may not,
by being too far advanced before the other, be ex-
poſed to its fire. And laſtly, that the ſame platoon
may not, by any oblique inclination which it might
take when too much advanced, fhut out or prevent
the other from conveniently coming in again to its
former place after firing. But beſides the above pre-
cautions, there is another conſiderable advantage re-
ſulting from making the firing platoon thus to ad-
vance before the other, which is, that this move-
ment carries on the line much better, and gives a
more intrepid appearance to the whole in advancing.
XXVII. Preſent.
See the twenty-third word of command of this
fection.
XXVIII. Fire.
See the twenty-fourth word of command of this
fection.
XXIX. Left

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
113
XXIX. Left-hand Platoon make ready.
Note, This operation, together with the preſenting
and firing, are performed in the fame manner as that
of the right-hand platoon, to which I refer,
Caution.
Take care to fire retreating.
XXX. To the Right about. March.
Direction,
The whole is then to go to the right about on the
left heel, ſtepping off with the left foot.
XXXI. Right hand Platoon, make ready.
Direction.
Note, This operation is performed in the fame
manner as that of the twenty-fixth word of com-
mand of this ſection, but with this difference, that the
platoon is firſt to come to the right about, and then
cock, lock up, preſent, and fire, as before directed ;
and on firing, it is again to go to the right about,
march, and join the line or the other platoon, who is
ſtill to continue moving on, as it did in advancing;
and then to half-cock, prime and load, &c.
Р
XXXII. Left

I14
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXXII. Left hand Platoon make ready.
Direction.
Note, This operation is performed in the ſame
manner as the laſt word of command.
XXXIII. Halt.
Dire&tion.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
XXXIV. Front.
Direction.
The whole is to come to the right about, and to
ftand in
proper
order.
XXXV. Shoulder your Firelockså
Direction.
See the twenty-fixth word of command of the
laft fection.
XXXVI. Rear ranks open to whole diſtance:
Direction.
The centre and rear ranks are to go to the right
about, upon their left heels.
XXXVII. March

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
115
XXXVII. March.
Direction.
The centre rank is to march three paces, and the
rear rank fix, each rank ſtepping off at the ſame time
with the left feet; and when they arrive at their
ground, they are to ſtand ſquare and in proper order.
XXXVIII. Front.
Direction.
The two rear ranks are to come to the right about
upon their left heels, and to ſtand in proper Order,
XXXIX. Support your Arms.
Direction.
Perform this operation as directed in the firſt, fe-
cond, and third motions of the twenty-ninth word of
command of the laſt ſection.
The recruits having been taught the uſe and ma-
nagement of their arms, according to the foregoing di-
rections, they are next to be taken to a butt, where
each man is to practiſe firing with a ſingle ball at a
mark. The mark to be ſhot at is to be placed at the
diſtance of about fixty yards, and at the height of three
feet; and when the men become thus good marks-
men, they are then to be again formed as before into
three ranks, and to fire together or in platoon. The
mark they are now to fire at, is to be a chalk line drawn
upon a wall, a little longer than the extent of the rank
intire
a
P 2

I16
NEW SYSTEM OF
intire, and of the fame height with that of the butt,
and the men placed at the ſame diſtance from it, and
when they have become expert in this firing alſo, they
are then to be ſhewn the effect of this fire, with a view,
that by knowing their own capacity, they may after-
wards have ſuch a dependance upon themſelves, as to
inſpire them with more intrepidity and reſolution,
whenever they ſhall have occafion to face the enemy,
The recruits being thus inſtructed and made perfect
in each of the aboye points, the Serjeant is then to dif
miſs them; and afterwards to report their condition
and capacity to his commanding officer, in order that
they may be re-examined by the Adjutant, and deliv,
ered over to him.
CHAP

MILITARY DISCIPLINE
117
CH A P. IV.
The Duty of the Adjutant.
A
Of Arrangements.
N Arrangement is that difpofition made of a bo-
dy of men as can beſt anſwer the purpoſe of at-
tack or defence; and is comprehended under the figure
or form of either the line, the column, or the ſquare.
But previous to thoſe operations, I ſhall give the fol-
lowing Inſtructions,
Sec T. I. Infructions.
I. The recruits or foldiers being formed into batta-
lion, or line drawn up in three ranks, or three deep,
the Adjutant is to ſee that the ranks be at open order
or at whole diſtance, and well drefled, that the files be
completed, the men do cover well, and that each man
does ſtand in his proper order.
II. He is to tell off the battalion into ten platoons or
diviſions, and to be numbered from right to left.
.
No. I. is to repreſent the diviſion of grenadiers on the
right, No. II. and III. are to compoſe the firſt grand
diviſion, No. IV. and v. are to make the ſecond grand
diviſion, No. VI. and VII, the third grand diviſion,
No. VIII. and IX. the fourth grand diviſion, and
No. X. the diviſion of grenadiers on the left of the
battalion. The five diviſions on the right of the centre
of the battalion, compoſe the right wing; and the five
the left make the left wing of the battalion.
III.

Ī18
NE W SYSTEM OF
III. He is to appoint a Serjeant to command cach di-
viſion, beſides otherSerjeants to attend and inſpect the rear
IV. He is alſo to appoint a guide, to time and direct
the fevejal motions of the different words of command.
V. He is to direct the men to obſerve attentively the
diviſion and vank they belong to ; and alſo their right
and left han I men, and their file leaders, to the intent
that they mły, whenever they are ordered, or ſhould
at any tine be broke, the more readily fall in of them
felves, and draw up in their proper places ; and in or-
der to perfect them in ſo indiſpenſable a point of know-
ledge and diſcipline, he is to take frequent occafion to
diſperſe and aſſemble them again.
VI. The above points being fettled, he is then to
make the recruits perform that part of the parade and
field exerciſe, which were taught them by the Serjeant;
that he may either report the ſtate he finds them in to
the commanding officer, or re mand them himſelf in
caſe of deficience to the Serjeant again for better in-
ftruction. And on the above exerciſes being gone
through, and no objection to the performance, he is
then to begin with inſtructing them himſelf in the fol-
lowing arrangements, and according to the directions
laid down for that purpoſe.
S E C T. II. Of the Line.
The line is an uniformn rank of men, extending in
length according to their number, or to the ground
they are to occupy; and this rank either remains fin-
gle, or is ſtrengthened or ſupported as occaſion ren
quires, by the addition of one or more ranks drawn up
parallel to the firſt, and a limited diſtance from it.
And the line being thus formed, the principal opera-
tions of which are as follow.
Ift.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
119
ift Rear Ranks cloſe to Half Diſtance.
Direction.
This operation is performed as directed in Chap. II.
Sect. VI. Art. II. word of command VIII.
2d Battalion by Files, prepare to take other
Ground.
Dire&tion.
The whole is to be in readineſs to face.
Note, The word Battalion fignifies any number of
companies or divifions formed and joined together in a
line.
3d Battalion by Files, take Ground to the Right.
Direction.
The whole is to make a full face to the right on the
left heel, falling back with the right foot.
4th Bat-

1 20
NEW SYSTEM OF
4th Battalion, March.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off with the left foot, being
that next the front, and to march by files; always
obſerving that if a man can ſee the ſecond or third from
him, the file or rank in which he is cannot be ſtraight,
which he muſt endeavour inſtantly to rectify.
5th Battalion, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt and in proper order:
6th Battalion, Front.
Direction.
The whole is to make a full face to the front on
the left heel, bringing up the right foot.
7th Bat-

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
I 21
7th Battalion by Files, take Ground to the Left.
Direction.
The whole is to make a full face to the left, on
the left, bringing up the right foot.
8th Battalion, March.
DireEtion.
The whole is to ftep off with the right foot, or
with that next the front.
9th Battalion, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, and in proper onder.
Ioth Battalion, Front.
Direction.
The whole is to make a full face to the front on
the left heel, falling back with the right foot.
a
This

122
NEW SYSTEM OF
This method of marching by files either to the right
or to the left, as occafion requires, is uſeful in many
cafés, but more particularly in the three following in-
ſtances. Firſt, it inſtructs us how we may gain, be-
fore we come to a cloſe engagement with the enemy,
either his flank, or prevent his taking that advantage
of us, or at the leaſt, how we may bring ourſelves in-
to an oppofite direction with him. Next, this method
enables us, without the leaſt inconvenience, to give or
take ground in the line, either for the purpoſe of mak-
ing room for others, or of accommodating ourſelves.
And, laſtly, it is no leſs uſeful in preventing the bad
conſequence of having the intervals between the ſeveral
battalions of the line too open or too much cloſed.
But as to the application of the above method of
marching by files on the long March, I cannot by any
means approve or recommend it, becauſe a battalion or
body of men unavoidably occupies by that order of
march, much more than double the extent of ground
it ought to cover, and that ariſing from the following
circumſtances : Firſt, when foldiers are on a march,
they are frequently obliged to carry their tent poles,
and ſeveral other articles of their camp equipage with
them; and then they find themſelves under a neceffity,
for the convenience of carriage, to fling fome of thoſe
materials upon the ends of thoſe poles, which ſticking
out behind, oblige the men immediately following to
keep at a diſtance, in order to avoid running their faces
againſt them. Next, there is the like inconvenience
occafioned from the firelocks, which the men often
find neceſſary to carry level upon their ſhoulders, as
well for the eaſe of carriage in that reſpect, as to relieve
now and then the hand that ſupports the firelock.
And, laſtly, there is beſides, the natural projection of
the

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
123
the body, which every man muſt have more or lefs in
proportion to the degree of his movement, whether
he walks or runs, which will likewiſe, of itſelf, cauſe
the files to open.
And hence, upon the whole, the
reaſon why a body of infantry, marching by files, can-
not preſerve their primitive diſtances, and muft there-
fore occupy an improper extent of ground, and of
courſe lengthen the line of march.
Now, ſhould the enemy ſuddenly appear upon ei-
ther flank, and as rapidly make his puſh or attack up-
on troops in ſuch open order, he would find but little
difficulty or obſtruction to penetrate and put them all to
the rout, fince before fufficient time could be had to
clofe the files, and to make a proper diſpoſition, all
would be over,
And hence ariſes a material piece of
intelligence, neceſſary for a partizan to be made ac-
quainted with, viz. whether the order of march of the
enemy is by files, or by ranks.
But admitting that no ſuch attack was to be appre-
hended, there is ſtill another diſadvantage ariſing from
too open and extenſive a line of march, very affecting
to thoſe who are in the rear, which is this: that as
they are ever urged by their officers, as often as they
open, to regain their proper diſtance from the front;
the hurry and fatigue they fuffer in endeavouring to
effect it, fo weakens and diſpirits them, that it is no
uncommon thing to obſerve, that the rear only of a
fingle battalion under this order of march is frequently
tired and knocked up, while the van is ſcarcely made
warm by the march ; but as I am ſoon to treat of the
column, I will defer enlarging more on the diſadvan-
tage of marching by files, as I ſhall there have occaſion
to renew this ſubject again, and offer a remedy for the
inconveniencies reſulting from it.
Q2
nith Battalion,
a

124
NEW SYSTEM OF
IIth Battalion, prepare to advance.
Direction
At this precaution the men are to appear ſteady,
and to hold themſelves in readineſs to march.
I2th Battalion, March.
Direction.
The men are to ſtep off together with their left
feet, taking the utmoſt care to preſerve a ſtraight line
as they advance.
13th Battalion, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, bringing up the hind
foot.
14th Bat-

MILITARY DISCIPLIN M.
I 25
14th Battalion, prepare to retreat.
Direction.
The whole is to go to the right-about upon the left
heel, and then to ſtand ſquare.
15th Battalion, March.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off, beginning the march with
the left foot, and to move flow or quick, as ſhall be
directed.
16th Battalion, Halt.
Dire&tion.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, bringing up the hind foot.
17th Bat-

126
NEW SYSTEM OT
17th Battalion, Front,
Direction.
The whole is to come to the right-about upon the
left heel, and to ſtand in proper order,
,
There is no one part of the exerciſe in which greater
nicety and more exactnefs is required, than in the ar-
ticle of marching, whether advancing or retreating,
nor yet more neceſſary to obſerve; for it is not fuffi-
cient that a ſingle battalion marches ſtraight and even
in all its parts, with relation to itfelf alone, but it muſt
preſerve the ſame order with reſpect to all other batta"
lions, advancing together in the ſame line with it;
the reaſon of which is, that by thus obſerving an en-
tire ſtraight line, each part can on any emergence not
only more immediately fuſtain the other, but be in a
readineſs to attack and cut off that part of the enemy's
line, which may be imprudent enough to be too far
advanced before the reſt can well move up to ſupport
it. And the ſame reaſon holds good in retreating, as
the part neareſt the enemy muſt be more expoſed,
fince thoſe who are more remote cannot be in a condi-
tion to afford the neceſſary ſuccour; in ſhort, the ad-
vantage is ſo great in 'preſerving a proper order in
marching, that but little more is befides wanting to
render thoſe troops invincible who obſerve it; and as
this is ſo well known, I would therefore recommend,
in order to have ſoldiers expert and perfect in fo ef-
fential an operation, that the battalion be well exer-
ciſed in marching by diſtinct and ſeparate divifions, ſo
that each divifion may repreſent a battalion, and to be
drawn

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
1 27
drawn up at the diſtance of thirty yards from each o-
ther, which is the ordinary interval between battalions
in the line, it being the allowance of room requiſite
for the working of two field pieces.
18th Battalion, by Diviſion, half wheel to
the Right, March.
Direction.
Each diviſion is to wheel the half of a quadrant up-
on the right heel of che right hand man of the front
rank.
19th Diviſions, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, and in proper order.
XX. Diviſions, as you were, March.
Direction.
All the diviſions are to wheel back together, upon
the fame heel, to their former ground.
XXI.

128
NEWSYSTEM OF
XXI. Battalion, by Diviſion, half-wheel to
the Left, March.
Direction,
Each divifion is to wheel the half of a quadrant up-
on the left heel of the left-hand man of the front rank.
XXII. Diviſions, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
XXIII. Diviſions, as you were, March.
Direction.
All the diviſions are to wheel back together, upon
the ſame left heel, to their former ground.
The intent of the above operations is to inſtruct a
platoon officer how he is occaſionally to give a flanking-
fire; that is, ſhould he find that he out-flanks the e-
nemy; or that he has no enemy directly to oppoſe
him, or, ſhould he obſerve the enemy advancing, in
order to penetrate or force ſome contiguous part of
his own line or battalion ; he is then, on any of
thoſe occaſions or ſuch like inſtances, to wheel his di-
viſion or platoon accordingly, and throw in his flank-
ing-fire. But the officer in wheeling his divifion muſt
attend minutely to one effential circumſtance, which
is,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
129
is, that he wheels juſt ſo much as to bring the object
at which he is to fire to be directly oppoſite to himſelf,
or that it may ſtand at right angles with the front of
his platoon ; by which means he will obtain the ad-
vantage of a direct fire, which is by much of greater
weight and more certain than any that be given in an
oblique direction, for let it be obſerved, that men in
general will naturally, on any fudden occaſion, fire
directly before them ; nor can they well be brought
to fire obliquely, except they are, with great care,
previouſly prepared for it; and even then, none but
thoſe who are drawn up in a ſingle rank can conveni-
ently do it with any tolerable effect; but at exerciſe or
on ſervice, the diviſions then are not to wheel all at
once to the right or to the left, as above directed, but
each is to wheel and fire in an alternate ſucceſſion,
left the external flank of one diviſion ſhould by chance
be placed in the line of the other's fire, which is a
point that troops muſt always be inſtructed to avoid
and to guard againſt, and therefore the preparative
for this arrangement is only to ſay, battalion, take
care to perform your flank-firing ; and on the ſignal or
word of command being in conſequence given, each
diviſion is to wheel and fire alternately as above di-
rected.
XXIV. Battalion, prepare to open at the Centre.
Direction.
The four centre diviſions, viz. fourth, fifth, fixth,
and ſeventh, or the ſecond and third grand diviſions
R
(feet

130
NEW SYSTEM OF
(fee the annexed figure) are to go to the right about;
by which means their rear that was will now become
their preſent front..
XXV. Battalion, open at the Centre, March.
Direction.
The two fecond grand diviſions on the right of the
centre of the battalion, and now faced to the right
about, is to wheel to the left, upon the left heel of the
left hand man of their preſent front rank, and the
third grand diviſion, which is on the left of the cen-
tre, is to wheel alſo to the right, upon the right heel of
the right hand man of the fame rank.
>
XXVI. Diviſions, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
XXVII. Diviſions, cover your Flanks by the
Battalion, March.
Direction.
The two centre grand diviſions that wheeled, viz.
the ſecond and third, are to march forward four paces,
which will bring the original front or the prefent rear
of each, in a line with the inward three files of the
contiguous grand diviſions of the battalion that ſtand
faſt.
XXVIII.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
131
.
.
XXVIII. Diviſions to the Right About.
Direction.
Each of theſe two grand diviſions is to come to the right-about, and ſtand in proper or-
.
der, in which pofition they will front each other. See the Figure ; the dotted lines, re-
preſenting the former poſitions; the whole lines, the preſent; and the figures ſhewing the
number and place of each grand diviſion, diviſion or company, that compoſe the battalion.
Front.
4th Grand D
3d Grand D
2d Grand D
ift Grand D
IO
9
8
7
6
5
4
2
3
4
7
9
Santan
The

132
NEW SYSTEM OF
The above arrangement is in a great meaſure in-
tended for thoſe battalions which compoſe the ſecond
line, and is calculated for the following purpoſes : Ei-
ther that it may afford a commodious interval for ca-
valry occaſionally to paſs through: Or, that it may
ferve as a ſafe retreat, on any preſſing emergence, for
the oppoſite battalion of the firſt line ; for which laſt
purpoſe it effectually provides, ſince thoſe who are
appointed to defend that paſs or interval are drawn up
with a full front on each ſide; to reſtrain and ſtop the
purſuit of the enemy. And here it may be obſerved,
that thoſe principal points are obtained without fuffer-
ing the leaſt inconvenience, as this difpofition neither
incumbers the battalion, nor in any wiſe affects the
activity of it; which I much doubt could not be ſo
well accompliſhed, were the diviſions to be doubled
according to the preſent method. There is beſides
another very conſiderable uſe which may be made of
this arrangement, and of which the great Marſhal Tu-
renne had availed himſelf on various occafions, I
mean the advantage it affords in making a commodi-
ous and ſecure retreat, by the oppoſite battalions in
the firſt and ſecond lines alternately retreating through
and protecting each other,
XXIX. Battalion, prepare to advance in your
open Order.
Direction.
Thoſe grand diviſions which opened the battalion are
to face thus : That of the right wing is to face to the
right upon the left heel; and that of the left is to
face to the left upon the right heel; after which they
are, when ordered, to march by files, ſtepping off
with the feet next the interval,
X XX

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
133
XXX. Battalion, March.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off together,
XXXI. Battalion, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, and in proper order.
XXXII. Battalion, prepare to cloſe at the Centre.
Dire&tion.
The grand diviſion of the right wing is to face to
the left upon the left heel; and the grand diviſion of
the left wing is to face to the right upon the right heel.
XXXIII.

134
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXXIII. Battalion, clofe at the Centre, March.
Direction.
The grand diviſion on the right is to wheel to the
right, on the right heel cf the front rank man, and
that on the left is at the ſame time to wheel to the left,
on the left heel of him of the fame rank, like two
folding doors, fhutting in and cloſing each other at
the centre.
XXXIV. Grand Diviſions that cloſed, dreſs.
Direction.
Theſe grand diviſions that wheeled in are to march
forward four paces, which will bring them to their
former ground in a line with the reſt of the battalion,
and then halt.
Of Hedge Firing
As this firing is an operation which cannot be well
introduced into the ordinary exercife, on account of
the length of time neceffary to make the proper difpo-
fition; I therefore imagine that a deſcription alone of
the nature of it, with a direction how to perform and
practice it at other times, will of itſelf prove a fuffi-
cient inſtruction.
Hedge-
a

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
135
Hedge-firing then is only applicable when troops
happen to be drawn up oppoſite to one another, and
behind parallel fences, ſuch as low walls, banks,
hedges, &c. where, by the interruption of which they
cannot approach nearer to each other; now when
troops are ſo pofted, it is evident that the fire from the
front rank which kneels cannot have a proper effect,
becauſe the fence before them obſtructs their view of
the enemy. This being the caſe, the men are there-
fore to be drawn up two deep, which will of courſe
either make their ranks more extenſive, or will pro-
cure them a reſerve occaſionally to ſuſtain them. In
order then to the firſt, let an interval be made between
each diviſion or company of the battalion equal to half
the extent of that diviſion, taking care, at the ſame
time, to make a ſufficient allowance for the interval of
the platoon officer ; then fubdivide the rear rank,
and face it to the left, ordering the left half to march
and join the left of the front rank, and the right half
that of the centre rank.
By this diſpoſition the battalion will be extended a
third more, and the whole will be drawn up two deep;
and in that order both ranks are to fire ſtanding, the
front rank to fire as centre rank, and the old centre as
rear rank.
ار
Of Parapet Firing.
This firing, like that of hedge firing, cannot be in-
troduced conveniently at the time of the common ex-
ercife, as well on account of the length of time necef-
ſary to be taken up in the performance of it, as the
want

136
NEW SYSTEM OF
want of exhibiting the different fort of works it is cal-
culated to defend ; and therefore I ſhall here, as in
the laſt arrangement, only give a defcription of it, with
a direction how it is to be performed.
This arrangement is one of thoſe operations which
is intended only for defence; and therefore the me-
thod requiſite for that difpofition depends as well up-
on the nature of the parapet over which the men are
to fire, as upon that of the attack made to poffefs it.
ram-
There are commonly two forts of parapets or breaſt-
works erected; one with, and the other without a
ditch. The firſt is that which is erected
upon
the
parts of a fortified place, or that which forms lines to
an army, thrown up in the field, &c. The laſt is that
which conſtitutes the covert-way of a fortreſs, made to
flope gradually from the top of it into the field, to the
diſtance of twenty or thirty yards, called the glacis.
The height of moſt parapets is between fix and feven
feet; and to them is added at the foot, or bottom of
each, another work, which is called a banquette or
foot-bank, whoſe height is about two feet, and whoſe
breadth is about three. The defign of which is evi-
dently for a rank only of ſoldiers to mount and ſtand
upon, in order to fire over the top of the parapet.
As to the parapet made with or covered by a ditch,
that work is not ſo liable to immediate affault; and
therefore the troops, which are appointed to defend
it, have the more time to make their difpofitions, and
to perform their operations ; whereas the parapet of a
covert-way, as having no ditch, is ever expoſed to im-
mediate aſſault, and therefore requires a different me-
thod of defence.
Now

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
137
Now in order to have a clearer idea of the defence
requiſite to make in either inſtance, it will be neceſſary,
to repreſent the different mode of attack on each, and
to fubjoin reſpectively a ſcheme of defence, meaning
only ſuch as relates to the muſketry.
Firſt then of the parapet with a ditch, which I fup-
poſe is attacked, either by making a breach in it, by
filling up the ditch with faſcines, or with ſome other
materials, or by planting ſcaling ladders to get over it.
Hence it is evident in either inſtance, that which ever
of theſe methods the troops take which are to make
the attack, they cannot proceed fo expeditiouſly and
uniformly, as if no ſuch impediment had at all been in
their way, therefore whatever difficulty or delay which
that interruption occaſions, 'muſt of courſe be of fer-
vice to thoſe who are to defend, as well in point of
time, as in the opportunity it gives them to diſpoſe of
themſelves to the beſt advantage, and to eſtabliſh regu-
larity in their proceedings. The defence then neceſſary
to make againſt ſuch an attack, and the operations
proper to obſerve, are as follow : The battalion, in
the firſt place, is to be drawn up on the rampart, or
upon the terre-plain of the place attacked, and faced
to the parapet, and each rank directed to fire only as
rear rank men. This being premiſed, the front rank
is ordered to make ready, and to mount the banquette,
and to direct their fire to ſuch place or quarter as is
pointed out to them by their officer ; and to fire not
by word of command, but as each man fhall of him-
ſelf take his aim : the front rank having in conſe-
quence fired, the men of which are to ſtep down im-
mediately off the banquette, bringing their firelocks to
he poſition of a recover, and then to face to the right,
S
and

138
NEW SYSTEM OF
and to march quickly off, through their officer's in-
terval, and draw up in their proper order in the rear
of the rear rank of their reſpective diviſion, where
they are to half cock, prime, and load. On the
front rank having fired, the centre rank is to make
ready, and to move up and take the place of the for-
mer as ſoon as it has marched clear off; and ſo on in
rotation with reſpect to each rank, the ſucceeding
rank always moving up and ſupplying the place of the
preceding one.
With reſpect to the attack of the covert way, there
are two ways of making it, the one by regular ap-
proaches, and the other by immediate aſſault. As to
the firſt, it is effected at the time when the beſiegers
have finiſhed their laſt parallel, which always runs
clofe to the foot of the glacis, or at the diſtance of a-
bout twenty yards from the faliant angles. Then
when matters are all prepared and ready, they firſt be-
gin by throwing a ſhower of live ſhells into the place
they intend to attack, in order to diſcompoſe and ter-
rify thoſe who are to defend it; and after thoſe ſhells
have burſted, they then throw another flight, and per-
haps of dead fhells, having only burning furzes in
them, of which the men in the covert way being ignor-
ant, and believing they will alſo burſt like the former,
they of courſe lie down to ſhelter themſelves from the
ſplinters; and then the beſiegers, under favour of
which device, ruſh out of their works at the ſame
time; hoping to find thoſe who are to defend, either
fo intimidated by the ſhells as to be off their guard,
or in their fire ſo precipitate, as ineffectually to throw
it away at too great a diſtance on the firſt appearance
of thoſe who begin the attack; and on this preſump-
tion,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
139
tion, they build their hopes of making an eaſy and
ſafe lodgement. Indeed it muſt be acknowledged,
that their confidence is ſeldom deſtitute of ſucceſs, ex-
cept the greateſt firmneſs and alertneſs is preſerved by
thoſe who are to defend ; and where that can be ob-
ſerved and maintained, then on the other hand, a moſt
dreadful carnage enſues, with a certain repulſe.
As to the other method of attacking the covert way
by immediate aflault, it is undertaken without any vi-
fible preparation, or rather by ſurprize ; and this at-
tack is commonly conducted under favour of the night
or of a thick fog; and the ſucceſs of which is likewiſe
founded on a preſumption of remiffneſs, or precipita-
tion in thoſe who are to defend.
Having now ſhown the different methods which are
practiſed in the attack of the covert way, that of its de-
fence will be founded upon duly conſidering the princi-
ples of the attack, and thence to deduce the means to
defeat and counteract it. In order to which, it will be
neceffary to recapitulate the former principles, that a
more diſtinct view may be had of them, and that the
ſcheme which I ſhall offer may be the better compre-
hended and explained.
Firſt, The probability of remiffneſs or precipitation
in thoſe who are to defend.
Secondly, The diſtance from the place of attack
being very ſmall, renders it impoſſible for thoſe who
are to defend to have time fufficient, after having once
fired, to load again, before the enemy will come up
and make a cloſe attack.
S 2
And

140
NEW SYSTEM OF
And laſtly, as the front rank of him who defends
can only fire at the ſame time, the difficulty, or almoſt
the impoſſibility, for the centre rank, or a freſh body
of men, to ſupply betimes its place and fire in turn,
before the enemy will be up and ready to charge.
The above being the principal points upon which the
enemy depend for ſucceſs, the method which I ſhall of
fer to fruſtrate ſuch their views will be as follows:
Ift. That cartridges be provided for the occaſion,
making each cartridge to contain eight quarter ounce
balls, with the uſual quantity of powder.
This hint I have taken from the French themſelves,
whoſe cartridges I obſerved were made up with one
muſket ball and two piftol balls in each. To try the
efficacy of which, I made juſt ſuch another cartridge
myſelf, and fired it at a mark about fixty yards dif-
tance, which I found had ſufficient force with it, but
as the ſhot were unequal, they ſpread themſelves too
much, which I diſliked; I therefore made
up
another
cartridge of nearly the ſame weight of ſhot as the o-
ther, which conſiſted of the number and ſpecies of ball
as I above recommend, and alſo fired it; and I ſaw it
had not only a proper force, but they ſpread them-
ſelves into the compaſs of about three feet and an half
diameter, being conſiderably leſs than the former and
more certain, therefore I preferred it, as well on that
account, as for its containing a greater number of
ſhot. Now as the object intended to be fired at ſhould
not be at half the above diſtance, and as the time of
advancing will be in proportion to the length of the
way,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
141
way, therefore the neceflity in this particular, to in,
creaſe the quantity of thot, in order to compenſate for
the want of time to load again, or to change ſituation
with thoſe who are loaded, ſince nothing elſe can be
found more effectual to ſtop the progrefs of the enemy
than fo great a weight of fire.
2dly, That the moſt cool, refolute, and beſt marks-
men be picked out to compoſe the front rank, who are
to be poſted upon the banquette. That no fire what-
ever be given before the enemy is within the diſtance of
ten or twelve yards of the top
of the
parapet.
And in
order to render the fire more certain and effectual, that
the front rank be ordered to lay their firelocks on
the top of the parapet, that it may ſerve as a reſting
place to take a more ſure and ſteady aim : that the men
be directed not to take aim above knee high, and for
the two following reaſons : firſt, becauſe thoſe who
lead the attack have their bodies commonly covered by
cuiraſſes; and laſtly, that the ſhot which miſs diſab-
ling thoſe in front, may take the thighs or bodies of
thoſe in the rear, ſince the slope of the glacis will of
courſe place them lower than thoſe before them,
3dly, That if there be ſufficient ſpare firelocks in
the place, that one of which be given loaded to each
front rank man, and placed cloſe by him, to uſe in-
ftantly upon any rapid puſh of the enemy, after he has
fired his own firelock. But ſhould there be no ſuch
ſpare arms, then the fire is to be kept up as follows :
When the man of the front rank has fired, he is in-
ſtantly to hand his firelock to him of the centre rank in
the

142
NEW SYSTEM OF
the ſame file, and take his back in the room of it; and
then he of the centre rank is likewiſe to give that empty
firelock which he received to him in the rear to load,
and take back his in return, ready to give upon occa-
fion to him in the front rank, by which means the
front rank man can fire, at the leaſt, three rounds in
a fhorter ſpace of time than the enemy can advance;
but if the two firſt fires are well timed and given, there
will probably be time enough afterwards for him of the
rear rank to load the empty firelocks, before there
will be occaſion for a third fire, as the confuſion and
carnage among the enemy will prove ſo dreadful and
diſtracting, as to prevent for ſome time their acting
with order and ſpirit, or their returning ſoon after to
the charge. But ſhould the enemy, nevertheleſs,
preſs vigorouſly on over their dead and wounded, and
before the empty firelocks are loaded; the front ranks
are then to rely on their bayonets, which will be found
very powerful when the enemy ſhall appear upon the
top of the parapet, while the rear rank goes on with
the loading, and fires over the heads of thoſe in the
front to ſuſtain them. In ſhort, were thoſe who are
to defend but to underſtand their own advantage, and
to act with temper on the occaſion, they would find
themſelves able to baffle almoſt any attack that ſhould
be made on them.
4thly, That as the ſaliant angle is the moſt expoſed
and neareſt to the enemy, it is therefore not only the
fooneft but the moſt ſucceſsfully attacked, by the great
facility there is of embracing the angle on each fide.
To prevent the enemy then from availing himſelf of
that advantage, thoſe poſted there, muſt firſt be in-
formed, by whom and how they are to be fuſtained
and

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
143
and defended, that they may on occaſion behave with
greater vigour and reſolution ; and that thoſe who are
appointed to ſuſtain them, be poſted on each ſide of the
re-entering angle, in order to ſcour the faces of the
angle attacked; which diſpoſition will expoſe the ene-
my to the fury of a front and flank fire, and if well
conducted will make a repulſe a matter of little diffi-
culty.
Sthly, That as ſoon as the battalion is poſted in the
works, the whole be immediately exerciſed in the fore-
going points. That their different defences be careful-
ly explained to them ; and that they be informed at the
ſame time, how they are reciprocally to ſuſtain each o-
ther, and how much their honour and ſafety will de-
pend upon their coolneſs and reſolution.
In ſhort,
nothing muſt be omitted which can inſtruct and invi-
gorate the men.
6thly, and laſtly, That careful and intelligent videts
be appointed and poſted at proper diſtances and places
upon the glacis, in order to give timely notice of the
approaches of the enemy. That thoſe videts be in-
ſtructed to watch particularly the motions of the enemy
after their flight of ſhells, taking it as a certain indica-
tion, that ſhould they then appear, the ſhells which
had been laſt fired, were not live ones, but dead ones,
and from which there is nothing to apprehend, and in
confequence, notice accordingly is inſtantly to be gi-
ven; for were the ſhells live ones the enemy would not
appear, left they ſhould themſelves be expoſed to the
ſplinters of them; and therefore they would for their
own fakes keep cloſe in their trenches and avoid that
danger.
In

144
NEW SYSTEM OF
In the above article of parapet-firing, I have been
the more diſtinct and explicit, it being ſo efſential a
part of difcipline for a ſoldier to be well inſtructed in,
feeing, that moſt if not all of the rules, which have
been delivered on that head, were rather fpeculative
than practical, and calculated more for parade forms
than different exigencies.'
Of the rejoicing Fire.
The rejoicing fire is uſed on obtaining a victory, or
on celebrating fome public feſtival, The performance
of which is very ſimple in itſelf and eaſily learned; it is
therefore ſeldom practiſed but on ſuch like occaſions a
direction alone being thought fufficient for the purpoſe.
There are, however, two forts of rejoicing fires;
the one by a volley, and the other by a running fire
from right to left of the battalion. On the battalion
being informed what ſort of rejoicing fire is to be per
formed, the ranks are firſt to be cloſed to half diſtance;
the men are then to prime and load; the front rank is
not to kneel ; each rank is to fire as rear rank men
only; and the whole is to preſent in the air. Then,
if a volley is to be fired, the whole battalion is to fire
together, either by fignal or by word of command.
But ſhould a running fire be made, it is to be per-
formed from right to left in the fucceffion of files ;
that is, the men of the firſt file on the right of the bat-
talion are, on the word, begin, to pull their trig-
gers; and then, as ſoon as thoſe of the ſecond file
obſerve the flaſh in the pans of the firſt, they are
alſo

MILITARY DISCIPLINE 145
alſo to pull their triggers; and ſo on from one file to
another, till the fire ends with the left hand file of the
battalion.
SECT. III. Of the Column.
The Column is a ſolid figure, comprehending four
right angles, and whoſe oppoſite ſides are equal to
cach other. This figure repreſents a parallelogram,
the two ſhorteſt fides are termed, one the head, and
the other the foot of the Column, or the front and
rear of it; and the longeſt fides are called the flanks.
But this form is not always obſerved or regarded, for
ſometimes the Column is broader than it is deep or
long, and ſometimes approaching to a ſquare, juſt as
the perſon in command will judge neceſſary to deter-
mine ; but in which ever of the above forms the Co-
lumn is conſtructed, the terms of its fides are immuta-
ble ; for the fide which leads is called the front, its
oppoſite the rear, and its other fides the flanks.
The uſe of the Column is, either to form a line of
march, to attack a paſs, retrenchment, or a breach
made in the works of a fortified place; and therefore
the head, front or breadth of the Column is made
more or leſs extenſive in proportion to the ſervice for
which it is deſigned.
There are two forts of columns, one is compoſed
of files, and the other of ranks, That which is for-
med of files, is nothing more but a battalion or a bo-
dy of men drawn
up three deep; and then faced ei-
ther to the right or left, and marched in that order;
but ſhould this breadth be deemed not fufficiently ex-
tenſive, then to it is added more troops formed in the
to make out the breadth or front
T
required.
fame manner,

146
NEW SYSTEM OF
required. With reſpect to the Column made up of
ranks, it is formed from a battalion or a body of men
drawn up alſo three deep; and then that body of men
is told off into diviſions, each diviſion being of the
fame extent of the intended head or front of the Co-
lumn; and thoſe divifions are afterwards wheeled or
placed in the fucceffion of each other from front to rear,
Each of theſe two forts of columns has its particular
advocates in point of choice; ſome preferring that
compoſed of files, while others eſteem that which is
formed of ranks. Were theſe different opinions limi-
ted to particular and not general uſes, each might oc-
caſionally be adopted, and an advantage be obtained
from it; but to ſay that either Column is fit for all
purpoſes, I muſt condemn the affertion ; fince it will
appear, upon a little reflection, that the fort of Co-
lumn, which is neceſſary for one kind of fervice, will
be found inconvenient or improper on a different oc-
cafion; and by the want of making this juſt diſtinc-
tion, and by the parties confining themſelves to ge-
neral and not to particular points, each becomes a bi-
got to his own opinion, and in conſequence irrecon-
cileable to any other. To remove then a prejudice ſo
ill founded, I ſhall firſt endeavour to fhew the power
and force of the Column itſelf, that a juft idea may be
had of its importance; and next, how in confequence
to apply it, under either form, ſuitable to the occa-
fion, that it may in its operation produce the better
effect.
The Column then, beſides the definition already
given of it, is a large, cloſe, heavy, compacted body.
its ſucceſs chiefly depends upon the impetuofity of its
progreſs in its ſolid form; the weight and force of
which being ſo great, when thus put in motion, that
DO

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
147
no acceflible line of men, retrenchment or barricade,
of equal extent to its breadth can reſiſt it, but like a
torrent bears down all before it. And though the
head of it may ſuffer much from the fire of ſuch line,
retrenchment or barricade, yet by its continually ad-
vancing and preſſing on, and freſh men ſtill prefent-
ing themſelves to ſupply the places of the dead and
wounded, it muſt at length arrive at the point of at-
tack, before thoſe who defend can poſſibly be prepar-
ed and ready to receive it afreſh ; and then of courſe
a rout enſues, through a ſenſe that the means of a re-
pulfe is no longer in their power.
On the other hand, the Column is alſo to be confi-
dered from the nature of its conſtruction, as a body
extremely unwieldy in itſelf, not only requiring much
time and ſpace for the operation of its evolutions, ei-
ther to reduce or to alter its form, but liable befides
from the leaſt violent impreffion made upon it, to be
involved in great diſorder and confufion, by the parts
being then broke and disjointed, and not ſo eaſily a-
gain put into order. It is a body that likewiſe requires
the greateſt equability and regularity in its movement
and progreſs, otherwiſe it will unavoidably open,
which muſt of courſe extend its rear beyond a proper
diſtance, and by that means enfeeble its flanks, and
expoſe it to total deſtruction from any fudden attack
made at the time upon it. And though it is a body
irreſiſtible in itſelf by any line of equal extent to its
front, yet it muſt ever be remembered how much that
advantage diminiſhes in proportion as that line increaſ-
es, or is more extenſive than the front of the Co-
lumn. And for inſtance,
Suppoſe two battalions of an equal force, and of a
like eſtabliſhment, oppofe each other. The one forms
thc
T 2

148
NEW SYSTEM OF
the Line and the other the Column. That of the line
is told off into eight diviſions or platoons ; and that of
the other into four diviſions, formed into a Column
either of ranks or of files, and that the attack of which
is made on the centre of the oppoſite battalion, whofe
two centre diviſions are, I ſhall ſuppoſe, of equal ex-
tent to the head of the Column, Now it is evident
that this Column will not only be expoſed in its pro-
greſs to a direct fire from the two centre diviſions, but
alſo to the flanking croſs fire of the three other diviſions
belonging to each wing of the line ; and as thoſe, who
give theſe three flanking fires on each fide, will have
nothing to apprehend from the immediate attack of the
Column to flurry or diſcompoſe them, therefore their
fire will have the moſt certain effect, being delivered
both with coolneſs and regularity; and though the
furviving part of the Column fhould nevertheleſs ſtill
preſs.on, the line will then have nothing more to do,
but to open to the right and left at the centre, and to
fuffer the head of the Column juſt to paſs through,
and then for each wing to clofe in immediately upon
it, and to charge it in flank with fixed bayonets before
it can have time to recover itſelf from the diſordered
condition it muft have confequently been thrown into
by ſuch a powerful weight of fire upon it, and then
inevitable deſtruction will as quickly follow.
Hence appears the neceſſity for examining, and
weighing well beforehand, what flanking force there
is to oppoſe the Column in its progreſs; and where
that is found to be too great for an open attack, then
recourſe muſt be had to ftratagem ; that is, where a
real attack can be concealed and made by ſurpriſe, or
where a variety of feints can be introduced remote from
the true attack, which may divert the attention of
thoſe
ܪ ܐ

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
149
thoſe who defend fuch feints, then the Column will
have its due weight, and will feldom or never miſ-
carry
Having thus fhewn the power and force of the Co-
lumn, I ſhall next repreſent what ſort of Column will
be neceſſary to apply under different circumſtances,
which I fhall endeavour to examplify by the follow-
ing cafes.
Caſe I. Suppoſe a retrenchment is to be attacked,
and that from a neglect, or from the nature of the
ground on the other ſide of it, no reſerve of troops
are there poſted to meet and attack the head of the
column on its forcing that retrenchment; and conſe-
quently all that is to be apprehended, is the attack of
thoſe on each ſide to take the Column in flank.
Conformable to this caſe, I would make choice of
the Column compoſed of files, becauſe, after it has
penetrated, it can, on facing to the right and left
outwards from the centre, inſtantly move forwards,
either to charge thoſe in flank, who may have ſtill re-
mained behind their works, and diſperſe them, or to
oppoſe a front to thoſe who, more remote, may there
have formed a line parallel to the ſhaft of the Column.
Caſe II. Suppoſe a barricade or retrenchment is to
be attacked, and that the enemy forms his line behind,
it at ſome convenient diſtance, in order to fuſtain that
work, and to attack the head of the Column as it
advances; and that the Column on its part has no-
thing to apprehend for its flanks, knowing the nature
and ſituation of fuch works, which cannot admit of a
flanking force ſufficient to annoy or impede it in its
progreſs,
Under

150
NEW SYSTEM OF
Under the circumſtances of this caſe, I ſhould
pre-
fer the Column compoſed of ranks, becauſe the rear
diviſions of which can by facing to the right and left
outwards, eaſily after join the leading diviſion of the
Column, and ſo form the line; which a Column of
files cannot conveniently, or ſo expeditiouſly do, on
account of the large ſweep which the ſeveral parts muſt
take in wheeling to accompliſh that operation, beſides
the rik of being thrown into diſorder by ſuch an at-
tempt.
Note, This Column I would likewiſe prefer for the
purpoſe of forming the line on coming out of a paſs or
ftrait, where no flanking force is apprehended to op-
poſe me,
Caſe III. Suppoſe a retrenchment is to be attacked,
and that it is foreſeen the enemy will, in order to fup-
port it, not only form a line to attack the head of the
Column, but will likewiſe form a line on each fide to
attack the Column in flank.
In this ſituation I ſhould make choice of what I call
the mixed Column ; that is, I would have the centre
part of the Column formed of ranks, and each flank
of files, in order that ſuch Column may anſwer the u-
nited purpoſes of the two laſt caſes, both for front and
flank attacks as is here required.
Cafe IV. Suppoſe you are to meet the enemy in a
ſtreet, road, or ſuch like fituation, where you and he
are equally alike incloſed in ſuch paſs, and that neither
of you can attack each other's flank.
In this caſe I ſhould prefer the Column formed of
ranks, becauſe, as noft, if not all roads, ſtreets, &c.
are

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
151
are ſeldom of an equal breadth in all parts, this Co-
lumn can, from its conſtruction, eaſily contract itſelf
by doubling its ranks, or again unfold itſelf to its for-
mer breadth, as the occafion requires, which operation
a Column of files cannot effect. And as to the method
of attack, which I would venture to direct in this fitu-
ation, it ſhould be, inſtead of making uſe of that ab-
ſurd form of ſtreet fire which is now practiſed, to
have the ranks to extend to the full breadth of ſuch
paſs, with directions, on no account to fire before
ordered, but to make uſe of the bayonet, and decide
the affair by manly vigour. The advantages of which
method are theſe, firſt, the enemy cannot get in upon
either of your flanks to diſorder you, the whole ſpace
being filled up And next, as the enemy will be ig-
norant of your deſign to reſerve your fire, and to de-
pend ſolely upon your bayonet, he will moſt probably
give his fire on your advancing, which as ſurely as he
does, he is inevitably loft; there being, I may ven-
ture to affirm, not an inſtance to be produced, where
foldiers have imprudently thrown away their fire, and
not finding the effect which they hoped to receive from
it, did not, on being inſtantly after cloſe puſhed,
think themſelves incapable of all further reſiſtance,
and in conſequence turn round on thoſe in their rear
to feck flight that way; and by the panic they com-
municate, throw all into confuſion and diſorder.
The only danger attending an attack of this fort is,
the riſk you run of your men giving their fire firſt, and
then the tables may be eaſily turned upon yourſelf,
which to guard againſt, I would recommend that the
front ranks be not permitted to load, which, inſtead
of leſſening their courage, will ferve to increaſe their
vigour in the attack, knowing their bayonet is to be
their

152
NEW SYSTEM OF
their only dependance, together with the certain fpirit
that an advancing motion will ever excite; but this
difpofition is a circumſtance which muſt be, to the
moment it is carried into execution, kept a profound
fecret from the enemy, left his knowledge of it ſhould
ferve to invigorate his defence, and make your own
efforts the weaker. And befides the above direction,
that thoſe immediately in the rear of the front ranks be
ordered on receiving the enemy's fire, to ruſh inſtant-
ly on over the dead and wounded, and charge the e-
nemy alone with their bayonets, and not to fire but
where perſonal reſiſtance is offered, and then to purſue
the blow, and conqueſt will as rapidly follow.
I have ſaid above, “ That abſurd form of ſtre
fire ;” and abſurd I muſt beg leave to call it, and for
the following reaſons. In our preſent difcipline we
,
practiſe two methods of ſtreet firing;” the one is, by
making the diviſion that has fired, to wheel afterwards
by half ranks to the right and left outwards from the
centre, and to march in that order by half-diviſions
down the flanks on each fide of the Column, and to
draw-up in the rear, and there go on with their prim-
ing and loading. The other method is, to make the
diviſion, on having fired, to face to the right and left
outwards from the centre, and one half rank to follow
the other; and in that order to march in one entire
file down on each ſide of the Column into the rear,
and there draw up as before.
Now by the firſt method it is evident, that you
muft, at the very leaſt, have a front of ground double
the extent of your rank; otherwiſe, the diviſion that
fires cannot wheel out and march into the rear, in the
order preſcribed; conſequently, by the advantage the
enemy will poffefs in having a front double in extent
to

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
153
1
to your's, it will enable him, not only to return your
attack with a front of equal force, but to attack you at
the ſame time on each flank with a quarter force more,
beſides the further advantage you neceſſarily give him
the time which you muſt unavoidably ſpend in the
wheeling out of your half ranks, in order to clear your
front for the ſucceeding diviſion to come up and fire in
turn, which are circumſtances in themſelves fufficient
to afford an opportunity to an enemy to deſtroy any
column that will make uſe of ſuch a firing.
And as to the other method of ſtreet firing, though
you increaſe by it the extent of your ranks, and conſe-
quently the weight of your fire; yet it is no leſs cer-
tain, that what is thus gained in rank or front is more
than loft in time, by ſtill the more tedious form of
making the half ranks to face to the right and left
outwards, and to follow each other into the rear,
which is an opportunity that a fagacious fpirited enemy
will not fail to improve, and take advantage of to your
total deſtruction.
Hence it appears, how neceffary it is to diſcover the
fort of diſcipline practiſed by the enemy, and by
knowing its defects you will be enabled to make a pro-
viſion accordingly, and to turn them to your future
advantage
The above being my reaſons for condemning the
Street-fire, I ſhall take no further notice of it in the
following work, but proceed to thoſe points which I
judge to be more effential in themſelves.
U
I. Bai.

154
NEW SYSTEM OF
I. Battalion, advance your Firelocks.
Direction.
See word of command I. Sect. III. Chap. III.
II. Battalion, by Files, prepare to form the
Column at the Centre.
Direction.
The battalion having been told off into ten divifions,
and numbered from right to left, and nominated as di-
rected in Sect. I. Inſtruction II. of this Chapter ; then
all thoſe diviſions of the right wing are to face inwards
to the left, as are thoſe of the left wing to the right,
excepting the three inward files of the ſecond and third
grand diviſions on each ſide of the centre of the batta-
lion, which are to ſtand faſt, and be the leading files
of their reſpective grand diviſions.
III. Battalion, form the Column. March. .
Direction,
The whole battalion is to ſtep off together. The
leading files at the centre of the battalion are to march
ſtraight forward, and as ſoon as the other files of the
fame grand diviſions come up to the ground from
whence the leading files had marched, they are fuccef-
fively to wheel and follow their leaders in a direct line.
The inward ſingle files of the firſt and fourth grand di-
vifions are, at the ſame time, to make an half wheel
to the front, and to march out, and lead in an oblique
direction

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
155
direction their reſpective grand diviſions, to join the
two centre grand diviſions, ſo as that the whole may
form in an even and parallel direction with each other.
And as to the firſt and tenth diviſions, repreſenting the
grenadiers on the flanks of the battalion, their inward
fingle files are likewiſe to make an half wheel to the
front, and to lead their reſpective diviſions to the head
of the Column where they are to join each other in
the front, not by files, as the other parts of the bat-
talion have done, but by ranks, and at the diſtance of
about twenty paces advanced,
The reaſon for making the grenadiers form by
ranks at the head of the column is this; that by their
making a greater front than the column itſelf, they
may ſo much the more cover the flanks of it from the
oppoſite fire of the enemy, and that by their embracing
a greater extent of the enemy's front, they may the
better divert his fire from the column ; by which
means when the column comes to arrive at the point
of attack, as it will ſuffer leſs to weaken and diſorder
it
, it muſt of courſe be more vigorous and regular in
its affault.
IV. Column.
Halt.
Direction,
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
The reaſon of this halt is to ſee that the whole is
completely formed, and in proper order to advance.
U 2
V. Column.

156
NEW SYSTEM OF
V. Column, advance to the Charge.
DireElion.
The whole is to ſtep off together, beginning the
march with the left foot, and to preferve throughout
an equal meaſure and the ſame pace, otherwiſe the co-
lumn will unavoidably open, and the rear will of courſe
extend itſelf beyond ics proper diſtance from the front,
and conſequently will diminish its weight and weaken its
efforts, and therefore as there is no one operation in
diſcipline which requires more a greater equability of
motion in its progreſs than this one, I would have the
column always to advance or retreat, either by mu-
fic or by fame other ſound, which can minutely
point out the time of the ſtep.
The column having pierced the enemy's line or
works, the following words of command are to be
given, in order to maintain the ground ſo acquired,
and to diſperſe afterwards fuch of the enemy as may
attempt to attack the column.
VI. Column.
Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, and inſtantly to cloſe up
.
to proper diſtance,
VII. Columns

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
157
VII. Column, face to Flank Attack.
Direction.
The two grand diviſions on the right of the centre
are to face to the right, as are thoſe on the left to the
left, and the grenadiers are to remain, as before, faced
to the front.
VIII. Ilank Diviſions, March and Charge.
Direction.
The two flank grand diviſions are to march ſtraight
forward, but the two centre grand diviſions are to
ſtand faſt back to back, in order to advance occaſion-
ally to ſuſtain the others.
Note. This operation will be explained better far-
ther on.
IX. Flank Diviſions. Halt.
.
Direction,
They are to ſtand faſt,
X. Battalion, prepare to retreat by Columns.
Direction.
The two flank diviſions are to go to the right about,
and to march, and join, as before, the two centre divi-
fions, which being effected, the whole with the gre-
nadiers are then to face to the rear.
XI. Column.

158
NEW SYSTEM OF
XI. Column. Retreat.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off, beginning the march with
the left foot.
Note, For as much as it was indiſpenſably neceſſary
for the Column to obſerve great order in advancing,
fo much is it more incumbent now in retreating :
this being the only critical moment for the enemy, if
he has any cavalry at all, to attack the column in
flank, and therefore the greateſt and niceft regularity
is to be maintained in its preſent movement. And
under this order of march, ſhould it be attacked, it
will then have nothing more to do, but to halt and
face outward from the centre, and keep cloſe back to
back, but the rear files, which now lead the retreat of
the column, are not, ſo far as three deep, to face out-
ward with the reſt, but to remain faced to the rear;
by which means the column will then, on the grena-
diers clofing in at the ſame time to the column, and
coming to the right about, form a perfect front to
each of its four fides, Why I would thus have the
grenadiers ſtill to remain at the head of the column,
inſtead of letting one diviſion of them to lead the re-
treat is, that by their conjoint weight they may the
better repel the enemy, who will not fail on this occa-
fion to make a vigorous ſally and puſh in purſuit of
the column.
XII. Column.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE
159
XII. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, and cloſe up.
XIII. Column, prepare to form the Line.
Direction.
The diviſion of grenadiers on the right wing is to
face outward to the left, as is that of the left wing to
the right. The files which lead the retreat of the ſea
veral grand diviſions are to wheel to the right and left
outwards from the centre of the column ; that is,
thoſe leading files of the firſt and ſecond grand diviſi-
ons are to wheel to the left, as are thoſe of the third
and fourth grand diviſions to the right, in order to
lead their reſpective grand diviſions to their proper
ground in the line.
XIV. Column, form the Line. March.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off. The grenadiers of each
wing are to follow their file leaders, and to march in
an oblique direction to the ground, which they are
to occupy in the line. The file leaders of the firſt and
fourth grand diviſions are to march'ftraight forward
to their ground, making the line of their direction to
ſtand at right angles with the ſhaft of the column ;
and as ſoon as the laſt file of each of the above grand
diviſions

160
NEW SYSTEM
divifions has wheeled, in order to follow in line their
refpective file leaders, then the file leaders of the fecond
and third grand divifions, are likewiſe to fall in and
follow, leading alſo their reſpective diviſions, excepting
thoſe files which had led the advance; theſe are not
now to wheel and follow, as the others did, but only
to move up to their ground in the line, and ſtand faſt
XV. Battalion Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
XVI. Battalion, face to the Front:
Direction.
The whole is to face accordingly, and dreſs.
XVII. Batialion, by Ranks, prepare to form
the Column at the Centre.
Direction,
The whole Battalion is to face inwards, as directed
in the ſecond word of Command, excepting the divifi-
ons numbered 5 and 6 at the centre, which are to ſtand
faſt, and to be the leading diviſions of thoſe of their
reſpective wings
XVIII. Battalion, form the Column March.
Dircttion.
The leading diviſions of the column, number 5 and
6,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
162
161
6, are to march ſtraight forward; then number 4 and
7 are to move on till they come to join each other, when
they are to face to the front and follow their leaders ;
and ſo on for number 3 and 8, and number 2 and 9;
and on the Column being thus formed, which will, in
appearance, make four grand diviſions following each
other, then thoſe ſeveral diviſions are to move up to
each other, and march in a cloſe and compact order ;
but number i and 10, the grenadiers, are to march in
an oblique direction, and join one another at the head
of the Column, as directed in the third word of com-
mand.
XIX. Column. Halt.
Diretion.
See the fourth word of command.
XX. Column, advance to the Charge.
Direction.
See the fifth word of command.
XXI. Column.
Halt.
Direction.
See the fixth word of command.
XXII. Column, form to Front-attack.
Direction.
The diviſions, numbered 4 and 7, are to face to
the right and left outwards from their point of junc-
х
tion

164
NEW SYSTEM OF
tion, and march directly forward; and when they
have gained a diſtance, equal to the extent of their re-
ſpective diviſions, then they are to face to the front,
and join number 5 and 6, on each fide, as before in
the line. On number 4 and 7 having marched clear
from the rear of number 5 and 6, then number 3
and
8 are to move up to that ground, and likewiſe face to
the right and left outwards, and march and draw up
in the line, as number 4 and 7 had juſt done before
them; and ſo on with reſpect to number 2 and 9, till
the line is formed as at firſt. The grenadiers, number
I and io, are at the ſame time to face outwards from
their centre, and draw up on the flanks of the battalion,
XXIII. Battalion, make ready and fire.
Dire&tion.
The firing to be obſerved on this occafion is to be
the alternate fire, from centre to flanks, and per-
formed as follows. The grenadiers, who cover the
Column, are firſt to fire alternately, and then to face,
as above, to the right and left outwards, and on their
march to cover the flanks of the Battalion ; they are to
go on with their priming and loading, and as ſoon as
they have fired, and in conſequence moved off, then
the firing of the Battalion is to begin from centre to
ftanks, each divifion firing in fucceffion as it draws up.
XXIV. Battalion, retreat by Column.
Direction.
The grenadiers on the right and left are to face
outwards, and reſerve their fire, which is not to be
given

MILITARY DISCIPLINE. 165
given but on the moſt preſſing occafion; then the other
diviſions are to fire alternately from flanks to centre,
and on each having fired, it is immediately to go to the
right about, and march forward three paces, and then
to face inwards to the centre of the Battalion, and
march cloſe in the rear of it, till it comes to join at the
centre its correſpondent diviſion of the other wing,
when both are together to face to the rear, and march
ſtraight forward, and then go on with their priming
and loading ; and when the two centre diviſions have
likewiſe fired, they are to go to the right about, and
march after the other leading diviſions in Column.
On each divifion having fired and retreated as above
directed, the grenadiers on cach flank are to occupy
fucceffively the ground fo vacated by the diviſions till
they themſelves come to meet at the centre, when they
alſo are to face to the rear and follow the Column,
ſtill not offering to fire, but where the moft abfolute
neceffity requires, and then only one diviſion at a
time, in order that each may the better ſuſtain the other.
Note, In retreating, the Column is to march in a
very cloſe compact body, for the reaſon given in the
eleventh word of command, and ſhould it be then at-
tacked the Column is then to halt, and the diviſions
are to face outwards from the centre, and keep cloſe
back to back, excepting the diviſion which leads the
retreat, which is to remain faced to the rear; and as
for the reſt, ſee the eleventh word of command,
а
XXV. Column Halt.
Direction,
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
X2
XXVI.

166
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXVI. Column, prepare to form the Line.
Direction.
Number 2 and 9 being now both together, and
conftituting the leading diviſion of the Column are
each to face to the left and right outwards, and the
grenadiers are to do the ſame.
XXVII. Column, form the Line. March,
Direction.
The grenadiers are to march as directed in the
fourteenth word of command. The 2d and oth divi-
fions are to march ſtraight forward, at right angles
with the ſhaft of the Column, to their proper ground
in the line. When the 2d and oth diviſions have
marched clear off the ground, upon which they ſtood,
the 3d and 8th are to move up to that place, and then
to face likewiſe outwards from each other, as the
leading diviſions had juſt done before them, and fol-
low. The fame evolution is to be performed by the
4th and 7th divifions, but when the 5th and 6th divi-
fions move up to the above ground, they are only to
Itand faſt, and not to face outwards.
XXVIII. Battalion. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt,
XXIX

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
167
XXIX. Battalion, face to the Front.
Direction.
The 5th and 6th diviſions are to come to the right
about, and all the other diviſions are to face to the
front, and then dreſs.
XXX. Battalion, by Files and Ranks, prepare
to form the Column at the Centre.
Direction.
Previous to this operation, the diviſions numbered
4, 5, 6, and 7, are to be ſubdivided ; and then the in-
ward ſubdiviſions of number 5 and 6, on each fide of
the centre, are to be appointed to lead the other ſub-
diviſions of their reſpective wings, which are to com-
poſe that part of the mixed column formed of Ranks.
The above matters being adjuſted, then the whole Bat-
talion is, on the above word of command being given,
to face inwards to the centre, as directed in the ſecond
word of command, excepting the leading ſubdiviſions
of number 5 and 6, which are to ſtand faſt,
XXXI. Battalion, form the Column.
March,
Direction.
The inward fubdiviſions of number 5 and 6 are to
march directly forwards, and the other ſubdiviſions are
to join each other, as the whole diviſions are directed
to

168
NEW SYSTEM OF
to do in the eighteenth word of command. The grand
divifions, number 1 and 4, are to march by files, and
to place themſelves in that order cloſe on the outward
flanks of the above ſubdiviſions forming by ranks into
column, as directed in word of command III, and the
diviſions of grenadiers are to march and poſt themſelves
at the head of the column, as directed in the ſame
word of command.
XXXII. Column Halt.
. .
Direction.
See word of command IV.
XXXIII. Column, advance to the Charge.
Direction.
See word of command V.
XXIX. Column. Halt.
Direction,
See word of command VI.
XXXV. Column, form to Front and flank
Attacks.
Direction.
Thoſe that formed the flank part of the column by
files, viz. the firſt and fourth grand diviſions, are to
face

MILITARY DISCIPLIN E.
169
face outwards, as directed in word of command VII.
and then to march ſtraight forwards, as directed in
word of command VIII.
The ſubdiviſions that form-
ed the centre part of the column by ranks, are to pro-
ceed at the ſame time as the whole diviſions are directed
in word of command XXII. The grenadiers are like-
wiſe to face to the right and left outwards from their
centre, and to march ſtraight forward and poſt them-
felves on the two angles, made by the junction of the
front face with the two flank faces, for the purpoſes,
either to cover thoſe angles, or to prolong occaſionally
either face.
XXXVI. Battalion, make ready and Fire.
Direction.
The whole is to fire as one intire line, by firings as
will be be ſhown farther on.
XXXVII. Battalion, ceaſe Firing.
Diretiona
The whole is to ceaſe.
XXXVIII. Battalion, prepare to retreat by
Column.
Direction.
The grenadiers and that part of the battalion which
had before formed the column by ranks, are to pro-
ceed as directed in word of command XXIII. And the
two

170
NEW SYSTEM OF
two flank faces, or that part which before formed the
Column by files, are to go to the right about and cloſe
into the ſhaft of the column, as directed in word of
command X, taking care at the ſame time, gradually
to cloſe in as the ſubdiviſions come to fall in and form
the centre part of the column; and on the column
being thus formed and in compact order, the whole is
to ſtand faſt.
XXXIX. Column. Retreat.
Direction.
See word of command XXIII. and word of com-
mand XI.
XL. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faft.
XLI. Column, prepare to form the Line.
Direction.
The grenadiers and the two flank diviſions in files,
viz. the firſt and fourth grand diviſions, are to proceed
as directed in word of command XIII, and the two
rear ſubdiviſions which led thoſe of the column in
ranks, are to face outwards to their reſpective wings,
as the whole diviſions are directed in word of com-
mand XXV.
XLII. Columns

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
171
XLII. Column, form the Line.
Direction.
The grenadiers and the firſt and fourth grand divi-
fons are to march and fall in, as directed in word of
command XIV, and all the fub diviſions at the centre
are likewiſe to fall in to the line, as the diviſions are
directed in word of command XXVI.
XLIII. Battalion.
Halt.
Direction,
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
XLIV. Battalion, face to the Front.
Direction.
The two ſub-diviſions on each ſide of the centre of
the battalion, are to come to the right-about; and all
the reſt of the battalion is to face to the front, and
then dreſs.
XLV. Battalion, by Diviſion, prepare to form
the Column to the Right.
Direction,
The ſeveral diviſions are to hold themſelves in rea-
dineſs to wheel.
Y
XLVI.

172
NEW SYSTEM OF
XLVI. Battalion, form the Column. March.
Direction.
Each divifion is to wheel a quadrant.
XLVII. Column. Halt.
Direction.
See word of command IV.
XLVIII. Column.
March.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off. See Chap. II. Sect. VI.
Art. .
XLIX. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ftand faft; and then each rear di-
vifion is to dreſs to its proper diſtance from that which
immediately precedes it.
L. Column, by Diviſion, prepare to form the
Line to the Right.
Direction.
Each diviſion is to hold itſelf in readineſs.
LI.

MILITARY DISCIPLIN E.
173
LI. Column, form the Line. March.
Direction.
Each diviſion is to wheel a quadrant upon the right
heel of the front rank man.
The intent of this diſpoſition is, that ſhould the e-
nemy be diſcovered on the right flank of the Column,
that then by wheeling the ſeveral diviſions to the right,
the line may at once be formed, in order to oppoſe a
front to his attack. The only inconvenience attending
this operation is, that it reverſes the order in which
the diviſions had before ſtood in the former line, by
making that flank, which was then the interior, to
become now the exterior ; but this inconvenience is
eafily obviated, by directing the officers commanding
divifions to change their fituation at the time of wheel-
ing, and to poſt themſelves on the preſent exterior
flanks of their reſpective diviſions, and then the dif-
ference
upon
the whole will be very immaterial.
LII. Battalion.
Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt and dreſs.
LIII. Battalion, by Diviſion, prepare to wheel
backwards to the Right, and form the Co-
lumn.
Direction.
The ſeveral diviſions are to hold themſelves in readi-
nefs to wheel.
LIV.

174
NEW SYSTEM OF
LIV. Battalion, form the Column.
March,
Direction,
Each diviſion is to wheel backward a quadrant upon
the right heel of the front rank man; and while that
operation is performing the officers are to return to
their former poſts.
Note, This operation can be otherwiſe performed
by firſt making the whole to go to the right about, and
then each diviſion to wheel to the left
upon
the left
heel of the rear rank man; and afterwards to come to
the right about, but as this operation requires more
words of command; and conſequently more time in
the performance, I have therefore made choice of the
former method in preference to the latter, eſpecially
where the diviſions are not too extenſive, as in the
preſent caſe. But where a battalion is to wheel back
by wings, or grand divifions, then this latter method
will be found more convenient, and in ſo much as an
extenſive rank of men can wheel with greater eaſe and
exactneſs forward than backward.
LV. Column.
Halt.
DireEtion.
The whole is to ſtand faſt and dreſs.
LVI. Column.
March.
Direction.
Sec word of command XLIV.
LVII.

MILITARY DISCIPLIN E.
175
LVII. Column. Halt.
Direction.
See word of command XLV.
LVIII. Column, by Diviſion, prepare to form
the Line to the Left.
Direction.
The ſeveral diviſions are to hold themſelves in readi-
neſs to wheel.
LIX. Column, form the Line, March.
Direction.
Each diviſion is to wheel a quadrant upon the left
heel of the front rank man.
The intent of this difpofition is likewiſe to oppoſe a
front to the enemy, ſhould he appear upon the left
flank of the column.
LX. Battalion Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt and dreſs.
LXI. Battalion by diviſion, prepare to wheel
backwards to the Left, and form the Column.
Direction.
The ſeveral diviſions are to hold themſelves in rea.
dinefs to wheel.
LXII. Bata

176
NEW SYSTEM OF
LXII. Battalion, form the Column March.
Direction.
Each diviſion is to wheel back on the left heel of
the front rank man.
LXIII. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt and dreſs.
LXIV. Column March.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off.
LXV. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt and dreſs.
LXVI Column, by Diviſion, prepare to form
the Line to your Van.
Direction,
The feveral diviſions are to hold themſelves in rea-
dineſs to form.
LXVII. Column, form the Line. March.
Note, Previous to this operation, I ſhall here fup-
poſe your column to be on its march, through a road,
paſs,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE
177
paſs, or defile, and now to be upon the point of juſt
entering into a plain, or open piece of ground, where
the enemy is diſcovered ready drawn up in order to
receive you; on notice of which, you are firſt to halt
and put yourſelf in order; and then you are carefully
to obſerve what ſort of difpofition he has made, to the
intent of your planning fome ſcheme yourſelf, which
may
either counteract him, or at leaſt procure you an
advantage over him.
To obtain which, one circum-
ftance you will always have in your favour, which is,
that he is confined, and you are at liberty to act, for a
diſpoſition once made by the enemy, cannot, on any
preffing occaſion, be foon altered without ſome difficul-
ty and great hazard, of which a fagacious officer will
never loſe fight, but endeavour, as opportunity offers,
to avail himſelf.
According then to the above premiſes, ſuppoſe thr,
enemy ſhould be drawn up cloſe to the outlet of the
paſs at which you are arrived. Now, in this caſe, it
will be beſt to line that part of the boundary of the
plain pext you, and from that cover to drive him off
with your fire, or oblige him to retire at a greater dift-
ance, or you may, by an unexpected ſally and rapid
puſh with your column, pierce at once bis line, and
then take him in flank on both ſides, and either diſperſe
or cut him to pieces.
Or fuppoſe you ſhould find him drawn up in a creſ-
cent, in order that he may with more advantage throw
in his fire from all parts of his line, on the point of the
outlet of the paſs. On this occaſion you are to look
for a convenient ſituation from which you may com-
mand him, and take the horns of his creſcent in flank;
and on your having found a proper place for the pur-
poſe, and poſted your men, you are then to obſerve the
effect
a

178
NEW SYSTEM OF
effect of your fire, and where you find it makes an
impreſſion, and throws the enemy into confuſion,
then is your moment to avail yourſelf of that happy
circumſtance, by making a ſudden vigorous fally upon
him, before he can have time to recollect himſelf, or
to remedy his preſent diſorder. Of all the affairs that
occur in the fervice, attacks of this ſort are thoſe only
by which an officer can have a fortunate opportunity
to ſignalize himſelf, and advance his reputation, there
being nothing more wanting, but a little prefence of
mind and vigour to follow his blow, and then he will
have better than a thouſand to one in his favour that
he ſucceeds, for the repulſe of thoſe who are near him
will ever communicate a panic, and magnify the dan-
ger of thoſe who are more remote, and then a hand-
ful of men will drive thouſands before them---fo loft
are men when once they come to be diſordered.
Or fuppoſe you ſhould obſerve the enemy to be
drawn up in a line at ſome diſtance from the outlet of
the paſs, and there waiting to receive you. You are then
firſt to take notice how his left flank, which will always
be oppoſed to your right, bears from you in front;
that is, whether it inclines to your right, to your left,
or is directly oppoſite to you; and as that will appear,
you are to give, beſides the ſuitable, the following gene-
ral inſtructions to your leading diviſion, which is to
ſerve as a guide to the other fucceeding diviſions how
to proceed, and when to draw up. Firſt, that it en
deavours, before it wheels in order to draw up, to gain
as much as it can on the oppoſite flank of the enemy, fo
as to out-flank him, to the intent of procuring by that
means a fuperior weight of fire upon him ; next, that if
this advantage cannot be obtained, that it does at the
leaſt draw up oppoſite to, but never within him, except
covered

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
179
covered from his fire. And laſtly, that it be careful
not to draw up fo near to the enemy, as to riſk its
being cut off, before the other diviſions can come up
to join and ſuſtain it,
Theſe matters I have premifed in order to explain the
intent of the following operation, and to thew how to
proceed on a ſimilar occafion, I ſhall now return to
the point of exerciſe, and go on with it.
Direction.
The firſt or leading divifion is to ſtand faſt, and all
the other ſucceeding diviſions are to keep marching on.
As foon as the ſecond diviſion has cloſed within two
paces of the firſt, it is to face to the left, and march
directly forward, and when it has gained a diſtance e-
qual to its own extent, it is then to face to the front,
and join the firſt divifion. On the ſecond diviſion
having marched clear from the rear of the firſt, then
the third diviſion is to move up to that ground, and
likewiſe face to the left, and draw up on the left of
the ſecond, and ſo on with reſpect to all the other di-
vifions till the line is formed.
Note, The above operation points out only the me-
thod of forming the line, when the left of the ene-
my's line is either oppoſite to you or inclines towards
your left; but when his left ſtands obliquely to your
right, then there are two other methods for forming
your line, and your choice of either will depend upon
his ſituation from you. See Chap. II. Sect. V, Art.
VI. Suppoſe for inſtance that he is drawn up about
two hundred yards diſtant from the outlet of your
paſs, then in this caſe, it would be beſt, without ap-
proaching him, to make your diviſions wheel to the
Z
right,

180
NEW SYSTEM OF
a
right, and march in Column along his front, and pa
rallel to him, till your leading diviſion has gained, at
the leaſt, an oppoſite direction to his left; when you
are to form your line by making all your divifions to
wheel at once to the left, and after which, to advance
upon him ; or next, ſhould he be drawn up at
greater diſtance from the outlet of the pafs than the
above, then you are, in order to ſave ground and
time, to march in Column in an oblique or diagonal
direction towards his left ; and when your leading di-
viſion has obtained the length and diſtance you re-
quire, then halt your Column, and order the whole
to make fo niuch of a wheel to the left, as to bring the
front of each diviſion to be parallel to the line of the
enemy, directing withal the ſucceeding diviſions, after
they have thus wheeled, to march forward and join
cach other in line.
a
LXVIII. Battalion. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
LXIX. Battalion, by Diviſion, prepare to re-
treat by Column.
Direction.
The ſeveral diviſions are to hold themſelves in rea-
dinefs.
LXX

MILITARY DISCIPLINM.
181
LXX. Battalion, Retreat. Marche
Direction.
This operation is nothing more but the reverſe of
the former : in that, the line was formed from right
to left; but in this, the line is reduced to Column
from left to right; which to effect, all that is requiſite
is, that the ſeveral diviſions do ſucceſſively go to the
right about, and march four paces forward; then face
to the left, and march on in the rear of the line till it
comes directly into the rear of the firſt diviſion, when
it is to face to the right and march on.
Note, When a Retreat of this kind is to be made on
ſervice, it will be more expedited and much better
done, by obſerving the method preſcribed in the
twenty-third word of command ; and in order to
make the retreat ftill more ſecure, it will be expedient
for the two rear diviſions, which lead the retreat, to
poffefs themſelves immediately of ſuch covers as border
on the inlet of the paſs, through which the column is
to retreat,
LXXI. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, and dreſse
LXXII. Column, to the Right About.
Direction.
The whole is to come to the right about.
Z 2
LXXIII.

182
NEW SYSTEM OF
LXXIII. Column. March.
DireEtion.
The whole is to ſtep off.
LXXIV. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
LXXV. Column, by Diviſion, prepare to forme
the Line to the Left.
Direction.
The ſeveral diviſions are to hold themſelves in rea-
dineſs.
LXXVI. Column, form the Line. March,
Direction.
Each diviſion is to wheel a quadrant.
LXXVII. Battalion, Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt, and dreſs.
Of

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
183
of paſſing a Bridge.
A bridge may, in a great meaſure, be conſidered as
a defile or paſs, through which the column is to march,
the near end being the inlet, and the farther end the
outlet of that paſs ; when the near end is fortified, it
is with a view as well to prevent a ſurpriſe of thoſe
poſted on the other fide, as to keep open a communi-
cation with that fide of the country upon which fuch
works are erected; but when the farther end is forti-
fied; it is only for the purpoſe of oppofing a paſſage
over the Bridge. Hence it appears, that the methods
of attack muſt be as different as the defences are vari-
ous, comprehending withal the nature of the ground,
and the diſpoſition of the enemy; and as there is in
either inſtances a vaſt variety, therefore it is, that no
one method of attack which can be laid down or prac-
tiſed at exercife will prove a ſufficient inſtruction;
for this reaſon then I ſhall only offer fome general
rules, which will be found, not only more comprehen-
five of this branch of diſcipline, but will ſerve to en-
large the ideas, and to give a greater fcope to the ima-
gination than can be acquired by any contracted fyftem
or ſet form, which feldom anſwers any other'end but
to limit the reſources, and to impoveriſh the genius of
an officer.
Firſt then, previous to the pailing of the bridge,
if good intelligence has not been already procured,
the ground adjoining to the place muſt be well re-
connoitred ; that is, you are to fee under what co-
ver you can to approach; what high or command-
ing ſpots there are near it; what is the breadth of
what is the nature of the works erected
by
the river ;

184
NEW SYSTEM OF
by the enemy; and what is the difpofition he has
made,
After theſe obſervations have been made, and con-
formable to them you are to frame or plan your own
difpofition of attack, and to provide yourſelf with the
neceffary materials for it. With regard to the diſpo-
fition which you are to make, you are carefully to al-
lot to each diviſion its ſeparate and diſtinct ſervice, in
order as well to prevent confufion, as that the ſeveral
diviſions may not claſh or interfere with each other,
and that more men may not occupy any particular
place than what are neceffary. You are likewiſe to
appoint ſome parties to annoy and keep the enemy in
play, while the others are in the mean time employed
in making preparations for the aſſault.
And laſtly,
you are to aſſign to other diviſions proper poſts, from
whence they can conveniently and eaſily fuftain and
relieve the different attacks, and likwiſe to cover your
retreat in caſe of neceſſity.
Theſe points being regulated and ſettled, I ſhall now
fuppofe, that the near end of the bridge is covered
or defended by either a wall or a retrenchment of any
particular form, and that from the bank of the river,
as is commonly the caſe, there is a rifing ground up
from it; then the firſt poſt which you are to occupy,
is to be that directly oppoſite to the paſſage of the
bridge, where you are to cover yourſelf, either by a
trench or ſome other
you may
find moſt
convenient for your purpoſe. This poſt is ſo much the
more eflential, as it not only gives you a command of
the enemy's works, but as it enables you to fcour the
bridge, and to prevent the approach of ſuccours from
the oppoſite fide; which laſt you will better accompliſh,
mcans, which
as

MILITARY DISCIPLINE, 183
as moſt bridges do riſe at the centre, and of courſe fall
off to each end, conſequently the whole of the troops
that come over it, will, from the centre, be expoſed all
the way to your fire, and in ſo much as one man in the
rear muſt appear above him in his front, and that in
proportion as the ſlope or ſpring of the bridge hap-
pens to be greater or leſs.
Next you are, in order to expedite the attack, and to
diſtract and ſtrike terror into the enemy, to make two
or more affaults at the ſame time, or to embrace all at
once his works on each ſide, ſo as to oppoſe a front to
each face of his defences; and for which purpoſe, you
are firſt to detach to thoſe places ſmall parties to begin
the attack, conſiſting each of a fingle rank, in order
as well to draw off the fire of the enemy, as that the
ſeveral diviſions behind may, in the mean time, come
up intire to join them, before thoſe who defend can
have time again to load. The intent of detaching fin-
gle ranks for the above purpoſe, preferable to two or
more ranks drawn up in the rear of each other, is to
render the fire of the enemy upon thofe parties the
more uncertain and ineffectual, by having a more open
and a leſs compact body to fire at. On the arrival of
your diviſions, the men muſt be directed to behave with
great coolnefs and deliberation, and to fire at none but
thoſe immediately oppofite to themſelves; and if this
regulation is well obſerved, neither great guns or ſmall
arms will be able much to annoy them, ſince the firſt
cannot be worked without the men belonging to them
being expoſed to your fire through the embraſures,
nor can the laſt have effect, fince thoſe who defend
muſt appear above the parapet in order to give their
fire over it, and then they can be inſtantly picked off
Or

186
NEW SYSTEM OF
or beat down again under that cover before they can
have time to preſent, or take any fixed aim. Matters
being thus diſpoſed, the pioneers are next to follow,
being furniſhed with the proper materials ſuitable to
the nature of the enemy's works; ſuch as ſcaling lad-
ders, faſcines to fill the ditch, hooks or other imple-
ments for pulling down and deſtroying the works, &c,
Where ſcaling ladders are requiſite, the application of
them will be found moſt ſucceſsful under cover of the
night or a thick fog, as the obſcurity under which the
attack is then made, not only magnifies the danger, but
diffuſes terror and confuſion among thoſe who defend;
but the caſe is otherwiſe in clear day light, as then the
place where thoſe ladders are planted can be eaſily feen,
to which parties may be ſent to oppoſe the attack; and
'beſides, as the tops of thoſe ladders muſt neceſſarily
reach higher than the enemy's work's, they likewiſe
can be ſeen, and can without any difficulty be eaſily
ſhoved off or overturned with forks, and without thoſe
who do it being expoſed, at the time, to any confider-
able degree of danger ; but in all thoſe attacks a great
deal will depend upon circumſtances which muſt ever
govern the conduct of him in command. But as to
fquare or triangular redoubts, having no baſtions, and
formed only by retrenchments, in the attack of ſuch
like works ſcaling ladders are uſeleſs at all times, the
other requiſites being ſufficient ; only obſerving, that
if there be attillery in the place which you are to at-
tack, that you advance, if you can, in the direction of
the capital line of ſuch works; and then the guns be-
ing in the embraſures, made in the fides of the redoubt,
and you of courſe in an oblique direction to them, they
cannot therefore be well traverſed or brought to bear
upon

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
187
upon you with any degree of effect, ſo as either to
retard or diſable you.
This outwork of the Bridge being thus attacked and
carried, the next ſtep is to prepare for the paſſage of
the Bridge itſelf. To oppoſe which, I ſhall again
fuppoſe the enemy to have thrown up another work at
the farther end, in the form of a creſcent or femi-
polygon, in order that he may the more conveniently
increaſe his weight of fire upon the point of paſſage or
outlet of the Bridge.
The preparations then neceſſary for this attack are ;
firſt, you are carefully to obſerve what part, and how
much of the enemy's works lie open, or expoſed to
your view, from your ſide of the river, and then
mark that place from whence you can enfilade or take
him in flank acroſs the river, directing thoſe, whom
you intend to poſt there, not to appear, nor to begin
their fire till the column is on the point of attack; in
order that the enemy may be the leſs prepared at that
juncture to guard againſt fo unexpected a blow, of
being taken both in front and flank at the ſame time,
The diſpoſition which you are further to make, and
the materials which you are to provide requiſite for
this aſſault, are much the ſame as thoſe of the laſt at-
tack, but if high mantelets can be procured, to roll
on and cover the men in front as they advance, they
will be of infinite ſervice, and will favour much the
attack.
Note, I could wiſh to have mantelets made of a parti-
cular conſtruction, ſuch as have not only ſmall holes
made in them for the men behind occaſionally to fire
through, but to have hinges at the bottom, that when
the braces or arms that keep them upright are let looſe,
they may fall forward, for the purpoſes as well of
clearing
a
Аа

188
NE W SYSTEM OF
و
clearing all obſtructions to thoſe behind, as of making
a convenient bridge to paſs over narrow trenches.
But if mantelets cannot be provided, then I would
have the leading diviſions to fling their muſkets over
one ſhoulder, and to carry faſcines in their hands ad-
vanced before them, and thoſe of ſuch ſufficient length
as will not only cover effectually the line of life, but
will appear at leaſt a foot above their heads, in order
to afford thoſe in the rear fo much a better ſhelter
and when thoſe in front come to arrive at the point of
attack, they are then to throw down at once their
faſcines, and handle their arms; and while they are
thus feverally employed in attacking their reſpective
parts of the defence, the pioneers are to move up and
proceed as before directed.
In advancing to this or any other attack, the men
are to march briſkly on, and for theſe effential pur-
poſes. Firſt, that it ſerves to animate them the more ;
and next, that it proves the only means to ſtrike dif-
may and confuſion into the enemy, and to induce him
in confequence to throw away his fire, either precipi-
tately or at too great a diſtance.
Having thus conducted yourſelf and driven off the
enemy, you are inſtantly to detach parties in purſuit of
him, in order to avail yourſelf of his preſent diſorder,
and to prevent his re-afſembling again to diſlodge you,
and could you have profecuted the ſame ſcheme at the
other end of the bridge, in conſequence of your firſt
attack, it would prove the moſt fare means of facilitat-
ing likewiſe the ſucceſs of this laſt enterprize, and
with little or no loſs on your fide ; it being a matter
to be depended upon, that thoſe who fly from you
will not only effectually cover you from the oppoſite
fire, but will ever excite terror, confuſion and diſor-
der,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE. 189
der, among thoſe to whom they have recourſe for
protection. This is then the critical moment for which
you are to lie in wait, and at which you are as eagerly
to graſp, it being from ſuch lucky opportunities as
theſe, that an active fagacious officer can never fail to
eſtabliſh his reputation, and to give credit and honour
to himſelf and to the troops of his prince.
The enemy being diſperſed, and proper precautions
in conſequence taken to maintain the poſts ſo acquired,
then the parties which had been left on the other fide
of the river to favour the paſſage of the bridge are to
be called in, and afterwards diſmiſſed to their reſpec-
tive corps or ſtations.
But as any attack, however well planned and con-
ducted, is nevertheleſs liable, from fome accident or
unforeſeen circumſtance, to be rendered abortive,
prudence then ſhould direct him in command, previ-
oufly to make a proviſion for ſuch an event, ſo as to
hinder a repulſe from becoming as far as can be a fatal
misfortune. To this end, there are two things which
he muſt ſtudiouſly endeavour to prevent and to guard
againſt. The one is, the diſorder and confuſion inci-
dent to a repulfe ; and the other is, the purſuit of the
enemy, which is ſeldom or never neglected on the oc-
caſion. As to the firſt, the whole command is previ.
oufly to be informed, to what place and by what paſs
the retreat is to be made, and how the ſeveral divi-
ſions are fucceffively to fall in; but as the order of
fucceffion here mentioned is more a form of exerciſe,
than a rule of ſervice, the diviſions in this laſt cafe are
to follow each other, as they ſhall happen occaſionally
to be drawn off, and on their arrival at their place of
deſtination or rendezvous, then, and not before, they
are to return if need be, to their former order or fta-
a
tion.
А а 2

190
NE W SYSTEM OF
tion. And as to the laft, namely, the purſuit of the
enemy, care is to be taken that a reſerve or fufficient
body of men be poſted in ſuch advantageous places as
may not only command the paſs through which the
retreat is to be made, but may ſerve to check and op-
poſe the progreſs of the enemy, directing ſuch party
not upon any account to abandon or give up fuch
poſts, before the command is either formed to receive
the enemy, or has gained a fufficient diſtance to ſecure
the retreat.
Now it may be obſerved, from all the foregoing cir-
cumſtances, and by a vaſt variety of others occafioned
by the difference of ground or diſpoſition of the ene-
my, that no one method which can be practiſed or in-
troduced at exerciſe for paffing a bridge, will prove a
ſufficient inſtruction, or even will convey a tolerable
idea of this part of the ſervice; and therefore, I am
of opinion, that a preſcription of ſome general rules,
fimilar to what I have touched upon, will be found
more comprehenſive and far better to be depended up-
on, ſubmitting afterwards all other occurrences and
cafualties to the genius and judgment of him in com-
mand.
SECT. IV. Of the Square.
The Square is a regular hollow figure, having four
equal fides and angles : the fides are all called faces,
which are termed and diſtinguiſhed by their fituation,
as front face, rear face, right face, left face; but
thoſe fides or faces do not, as in a geometrical ſquare,
meet or terminate in a point at the angle, but they are
fo contrived to lock, or ſhut in, as that the right of
each face may cover the left flank of the contiguous
face.
Now

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
191
Now as thofe faces ſtand of courſe at right angles
with each other, they are therefore capable to oppoſe
an attack made in their reſpective directions; but as the
direction of the angles ſtand oblique to that of the
faces, therefore the faces cannot fo effectually ſuſtain
and defend the angles as they can themſelves, by which
means the angles lie open and expoſed to any attack
made directly upon them. To remedy then this defect,
platoons or diviſions are poſted on thoſe angles to cover
them as will be ſhown further on,
The intent of the ſquare is folely calculated to de
fend infantry againſt cavalry. There are two ways
for forming the ſquare, one from the line and the
other from the column, For each of theſe purpoſes,
there have been various ſchemes and methods propoſed,
but I own, that of all I have yet ſeen or heard of,
there were none with which I could be pleaſed, be-
cauſe that from the line is founded upon wrong prin-
ciples, being not practicable upon ſervice, or at beſt
exceflively dangerous ; and that from the column is
partial and not general, ſhowing us only how to form
the ſquare out of a ſingle battalion, but not out of a
Nor am I more reconciled to our
management of the platoons which cover the angles,
that method being alſo erroneous, it being impoflible
to obtain fufficient time for the requiſite operations, or
if attempted, it muſt be at the riſk of total deſtruction.
Now, in order to ſupport theſe my allertions, I ſhall
begin with each method in the order it ſtands, and firſt
with reſpect to that of forming the ſquare from the
line In this particular let it be obſerved, that it is,
in the firſt place, an eſtablished maxim, “ That no
officer commanding infantry ought to form his line
againſt
greater number.

192
NEW SYSTEM OF
و
againſt cavalry, where he cannot with ſafety fecure his
flanks and rear;" becauſe, ſhould he neglect this pre-
caution, the motion of cavalry being ſo rapid, that
before he could have time to alter his difpofition, or to
change his fituation, he muſt inevitably be ſurrounded
and cut to pieces; and, in the next place, it is no leſs
à maxim, " That no officer ſhould form the ſquare
againſt infantry;" becauſe he muſt, by ſo doing, pre-
fent and expoſe to the enemy two of his flanks from
any direct view of either face. Hence then, in both
theſe inſtances, the abfurdity of any fcheme to form
the line, in order to form from thence the ſquare ; and
therefore I muſt condemn any method whatever of
forming the ſquare from the line, being totally repug-
nant to reaſon.
Next with reſpect to our method of forming the
fquare from the column, conſiſting of a fingle battalion.
This I alfo object to, becouſe the rule is partial and
not general; that is, it informs us very well how the
fquare is to be formed out of a fingle battalion, and
there it reſts, but it furniſhes us with no ſort of di-
rection or affiftance how that is to be effected out of a
greater number. I am therefore for having ſome gene-
ral rule to guide an officer, by which he can with equal
eaſe and regularity for his ſquare, whether it is to
conſiſt of one or of ever ſo great a number of battali-
ons, ſince it muft be confeffed, that there are circum-
ftances, which I ſhall relate farther on, that require
occaſionally ſquares of different magnitudes and capa-
cities; and where no rule is preſcribed for that pur-
poſe, the want of it muſt be productive of great confu-
fion, irregularity, and loſs of time, and, in the run of
events, may prove fatal to the ſervice, as well as detri-
mental to the reputation of hịm in command.
And

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
193
And laſtly, with reſpect to the management of the
platoons which cover the angles of the ſquare : Our
method is, that when each of thoſe platoons has fired,
the adjacent angle, or the angle it covers, then opens, in
order to admit it into the ſquare by way of retreat,
where it remains till ſuch time as it is loaded again
when it is to return.
Now, in order to point out the impropriety of this
method, it will be neceffary to confider, whether there
is ſufficient time for the above operations. To this
end, then, I ſhall fuppoſe a body of cavalry making a
direct charge upon one of the angles, and that this ata
tack is made with a velocity equal to the rate of only
eight miles an hour, and that the platoon which covers
that angle fires at fo great a diſtance as forty yards.
Now there are 1 760 yards in a mile, which multi-
plied by 8, the velocity of attack, give 14080, the
number of yards in eight miles, and this number,
14080, being divided by 60', the number of minutes
in an hour,, the quotient will be 234 66 yards, the
ſpace of ground over which the attack will move in a
fingle minute. Again, let 234.66 be divided by 60",
the number of ſeconds in a minute, the quotient of
which diviſion will be 3.91, the number of yards the
attack will alſo paſs over in a ſecond of time. Then
let 40, the diſtance in yards the cavalry is firſt fired at,
be divided by 3.91, the quotient will be 10".20 or lit-
tle better than the ſixth of a minute, the time in which
the platoon, after firing, is to face and march by files
into the ſquare ; and alſo for the divifion of the angle
which had wheeled out to admit that platoon to wheel
back again to its former ground, and ſettle itſelf to
receive the attack continued.
Now the point under conſideration will be, whether
the

194
NEW SYSTEM OF
the time of about the fixth of a minute, and regarding
it withal as too favourable a computation, will be fuffi-
cient to effect the above retreat, according to our pre-
fent method, befides confidering that the larger the
platoon is which covers the angle, the longer time it
will of courſe require to retreat, or to get into the
{quare. The anſwer, in my opinion, requires not the
leaſt degree of heſitation, even were the time double or
treble, feeing that the ſmalleſt ſtop or failure, occafion-
ed by any means at fo critical a juncture, muſt be at-
tended with inevitable deſtruction to the whole. Be-
fides, if it be held neceffary for this platoon to cover
the angle of the ſquare, as certainly it is, then why is
not that coverture continued, ſince it muſt be as uſeful
at one time as at an other ? and more eſpecially at a
time when it is moſt wanted, for common ſenſe will
inform us, that it is equally as well fuſtained on the
outſide of the ſquare, after it has fired, as any other
part of the ſquare can be under the like circumſtance,
after its having alſo fired, as will be demonſtrated far-
ther on.
And hence my reaſon for rejecting this
method.
Having now repreſented the impropriety and diſad
vantage attending our preſent methods of forming the
ſquare, as well from the line as from the column, and
alſo the miſmanagement of the platoons which cover
the angles, it now remains for me to offer a ſcheme,
in order to remedy thoſe defects. I have already
condemned every attempt to form the ſquare from the
line, and therefore I ſhall diſcard that point, and will
confine myſelf only to the forming of it from the co-
lumn, and in which plan I ſhall give the neceflary
directions for the management of the platoons which
are to cover the angles. But previous to this deſign,
it

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
195
it will be convenient to give the following inſtructions
to the Adjutant or Major of each Battalion.
1. That he do carefully inform himſelf of what
number of battalions the whole column doth confift,
with the order of march, or the ſucceſſion of the ſeveral
battalions as they march in column.
II, That each battalion be divided into ten diviſions
or rather companies, and numbered from right to left.
The reaſons for which will be hereafter given.
III. That the firſt and tenth diviſions, whether of
grenadiers or of battalion-men, be each fubdivided and
appointed to cover the angles of the ſquare ; and in
ſuch a manner that the firſt diviſion may cover the
angles of the front face, while the tenth do likewiſe co-
ver thoſe of the rear; but when two or more battali-
ons are conjointly to form a ſquare, then the number
of thoſe ſubdiviſions appointed for covering the angles
in each battalion is collectively to be divided into four
equal parts, always contriving to let thoſe which com-
poſe any angle diviſion be as near as poffible to their
reſpective battalions, in order that they may the more
conveniently fall in and join, when the ſquare comes to
be reduced again to column.
IV. That the eight other diviſions of the battalion,
viz. the 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, 8th and oth be
told off into four grand divifions, as before directed,
and appointed to compoſe the faces of the Square,
giving one grand diviſion to each face, in the follow-
ing order, viz. The iſt grand diviſion, or the 2d and
3d diviſions to make the front face. The 2d grand
diviſion, or the 4th and 5th diviſions, to make the
right face. The 3d grand divifion, or the 6th and
7th diviſions, to make the left face. And the 4th
grand divifion or the 8th and oth divifions, to form
teh rear face.
Bb
Now

196
NEW SYSTEM OM
Now, by this diſpoſition of the diviſions it may be
obſerved, that a ſingle battalion thus told off, gives
one grand diviſion to each face of its Square ; confe-
quently, if there were two battalions joined together
to form a Square, there would then be two grand di-
viſions to each face. Hence then the following Rule,
viz.
That each face of every Square do conſiſt of as
many grand diviſions as there are battalions
to compoſe the Square.
V. That the face diviſions of the whole Column
from front to rear, or as many battalions as are in-
tended to form Square be told off into four equal
parts, letting thoſe of each part know the face to
which they belong, that each part may in fucceffion
draw up, as is directed in the laſt inſtruction, that is,
the firſt part is to make the front face, the ſecond the
right face, the third the left face, and the 4th the rear
face.
VI. That the diſtance of each angle diviſion or
platoon, from the angular point of the Square it is to
cover, be equal to half the extent of that platoon, taking
the meaſurement from that point, to the centre of
the rear rank of that platoon.
VII. That thoſe platoons which cover the angles be
pofted not in the direction of the diagonal of the
Square, as our preſent method directs, but in the di-
rection of and at right-angles with a line ſuppoſed to be
drawn from the left-hand man of the front rank of one
face to the left-hand man of the like rank in the op-
pofite face, placing the centre of each platoon upon
that line.
The
a

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
197
The reaſon of the above difpofition is this, that as
the faces are not in contact with each other at the an-
gular point, as in a geometrical Square, but are ſo
placed to ſhut in, as that the left flank of each face
may be covered by the right of that adjoining to it;
then as the right flank of every face will by that
means lie open and expoſed, therefore, were the pla-
toon to be placed on the diagonal of the Square, as
our preſent method directs, it could not well cover
that flank: and for this reaſon I have, in order to
remedy that defect, pofted the platoons as above direce
ed. See the annexed Figure.
Bь 2
The

198
NEW SYSTEM OF
The Square formed out of one Battalion,
conſiſting of four grand Diviſions.
Front Face.
E
A
B
F
3
D
N
C
K
16
이
​M
H
L
Explanation.
Let ABCD repreſent the different faces of the
Square, B the left flank of the right face, covered by
A the right flank of the front face; and ſo of all the
left flanks of the other faces. EFG the ſuppoſed
lines

MILITARY DISCIPLIN E.
199
2
I
2
ΙΟ
1
line, paſſing through the left ſhoulders of the oppoſite
faces. H the platoon to cover the angle of the
Square, ſtanding at right angles with the line E F G.
H the right of the platoon, covering the right flank
N of the right face; which otherwiſe, by our preſent
method, would lie open and expoſed. The ift and
loth diviſions, or thoſe appointed to cover the angles
of the Square, are each fubdivided into two platoons,
and denoted by the fractional figures in their due
places, ,, , ; that is, fignifies the ift
1
ſubdiviſion or platoon of the iſt diviſion, covering the
right angle of the front face, the ſecond ſubdiviſion
of the firſt diviſion, poſted on the left angle of the
front face. It's the firſt ſubdiviſion of the roth divi-
fion. And the ſecond fubdiviſion of the roth di-
vifion. And the figures 1, 2, 3, 4, ſhew the fitua-
tion of the four grand diviſions or face diviſions, which
compoſe the Square ; and likewiſe the order of fuc-
ceffion, in which they are to draw up and poſt them-
ſelves to each face.
VIII. That the angle-platoons be directed not to
retire into the Square on firing, but to remain at their
ground. The reaſon for which is founded upon the
two following propofitions,
ΙΟ
2
TO
PRO P. I.
That every line of infantry, oppoſed to any other line
of Infantry or Cavalry of equal extent, is capable to de-
fend itſelf under ſimilar circumſtances.
Conſequently, each angle-platoon of a Square muſt
be held capable to maintain its ground againſt a front
or rank no greater extent than itſelf.
PROP

200
NEW SYSTEM OF
PROP.
II.
That the nearer the ſide is of any Figure to the centre,
the leſer will that ſide be.
Suppoſe then GI, of the laſt Figure, to be the fide
of an external ſquare, or to be a line of cavalry, op-
poſed to the fide CK of the internal ſquare. Now
were GI to move directly inwards, ſo as to place itſelf
at CK; then, by the figure, as the part LM of the
line GI will be only equal in extent to CK ; therefore,
by Prop. I. CK is capable to defend itſelf againſt LM,
Hence it is evident, that no fquare can be attacked
by cavalry, but by a front, at moſt, equal to the part
attacked ; and that only, with this certain diſadvan-
tage, as 15 is to 19; that is, 15 of cavalry in rank
will occupy juſt as much ground as 19 of infantry
will do, allowing three feet two inches to each horſe-
man, and two feet fix inches to each foldier. And
beſides the above advantage, which infantry have over
cavalry, there is one ſtill greater, which is, that only
the front rank of cavalry can immediately attack, be-
cauſe it ſerves as a barrier to keep back the other rear
ranks; whereas the whole three ranks of infantry can
once engage, and be mutually aſſiſting to each
other.
Hence the advantage which infantry have over ca-
valry; and that all ſquares, however ſmall in them-
ſelves, are equally formidable againſt cavalry.
But it may now be aſked, that if I will not allow the
platoon on the angle to retire into the ſquare after it
has fired, how then are its flanks to be ſecured ? I
anſwer, that the two contiguous faces are, either to
give a flanking fire on thoſe who muſt wheel in to at-
tack,
at

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
201
tack the flanks of that platoon, or at once to move
out and join thoſe flanks. And were different attacks
to be likewiſe made, at the ſame time, upon the other
angles, then the other faces are alſo to move out and
ſuſtain their platoons ; by which diſpofition the ſquare
will aſſume the figure of an octagon, ſtill more formia
dable than that of the ſquare, as the angle of the po-
lygon in one is 135 deg. and in the other but go deg.
And this new figure of the octagon is ſo much the more
preferable to the orb of the ancients, ſo much fpoken
of, as regular files can be had in the one, but not in
the other; and as a ſtraight line is more manageable
than a curve, the fire in the former being parallel,
but that in the latter diverging, and conſequently not
of equal weight.
Having already ſhewn how a ſquare can, with e-
qual eaſe and regularity, be formed, whether it is to
conſiſt of one or of any number of battalions, I am now
to repreſent the different capacities of Squares, accord-
ing to the number of battalions of which each is com-
poſed, knowing that no officer can well comprehend
this eſſential article, except he is endowed with ſome
ſmall degree of mathematical learning; and to thoſe
chiefly, who may be deficient in that reſpect, I take the
liberty to addreſs this point.
It often happens that an officer is appointed to con-
duct the march of a number of battalions, with the
neceſſary baggage; and to have beſides under his care
a quantity of ammunition and ſtores; and that his
route lies over open plains where he may be attacked
by cavalry.
Now an officer who is ignorant of the different ca-
pacities of Squares, will moſt probably argue thus with
himſelt: “ If I form a ſquare conſiſting of two, three
Or

202
NEW SYSTEM OF
or four battalions, that ſquare will contain no more
than twice, thrice or four times as much as the ſquare
of a ſingle battalion ; and as that ſpace will not be ſuf-
ficient to hold the quantity of baggage or ſtores under
my convoy, I muſt therefore make ſome other diſpo-
fition.”
Here then lies the miſtake, ſince the capacity of
ſquares is to each other as the ſquare number of the
battalions which compofe them ; that is, a ſquare
compoſed of two battalions will contain four times the
ſpace which a ſingle battalion gives, as the ſquare
27 umber of two is four. If of three battalions, nine
times the ſpace, the Square number of three being
nine. And if of four battalions, fixteen times the
ſpace, and ſo on, aswill be ſeen in the following table
calculated for any number of battalions under eleven.
Number of Battalions. 1112131415161718191 10
Capacity of different Squar. LI1419 16 251 36 149164181 | 100
&c.
By the above table it appears, that were a ſquare to
conſiſt of ten battalions, the capacity of it would then
be an hundred times as great as one compoſed of a fin-
gle battalion; which may be eaſily demonſtrated by
giving a grand diviſion, the fourth part of a battalion,
to each face of the ſquare; and then by drawing as
many lines as there are grand divifions, from any one
face to its oppoſite both ways; then the number of
ſmall fquares fo deſcribed and contained within the
great ſquare, will explain and ſolve the propofition,
for each ſmall iquare is preciſely equal to the ſpace
comprehended in a ſquare compoſed of a ſingle batta-
lion.
An officer then thus knowing the capacity of dif-
ferent ſquares, has nothing more to do but to adapt
his

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
203
his ſquare to whatever he intends to lodge within it,
and afterwards to profecute his march through any o-
pen country in that order.
But where he happens to be neither incumbered with
baggage or ammunition, I am in that caſe againſt his
forming a greater ſquare than that, at'moft, of a fin-
gle battalion, and for the following reaſon. Admit
that an officer is charged with the conduct of three or
four battalions, and on entering a plain, he forms
them into one entire ſquare. Now ſhould he be at-
tacked by cavalry, and that from fome unlucky acci-
dent, or the miſconduct of others, the enemy ſhould
find means to pierce any part of his ſquare, then total
deſtruction muſt inevitably follow : But on the other
hand, were there, inſtead of this great fquare, as ma-
ny ſmall ſquares formed as there are battalions, each
being equally as formidable in itſelf as one of a greater
capacity, and thoſe ſeveral ſquares directed to purſue
their march at about an hundred
paces
diſtant from
each other, then no ſuch diſaſter could well happen,
for if any one of thoſe ſmall ſquares is attacked, the o-
ther ſquares being at hand could not only eaſily move
up and ſuſtain it, but could afford that which might
perhaps be broke, a ſafe and convenient retreat.
But admitting that an officer has not under his com-
mand fo conſiderable a body of men as the above, and
that he is only marching with a detachment conſiſting
of about fixty men: Now in this caſe, as he cannot ſo
well form ſo ſmall a body into a ſquare, he muſt
therefore have recourſe to ſome other expedient.
The one then which I would recommend is, to march
his party by files doubled in column ; that is, let him
firſt draw up his men three deep, and ſubdivide them,
and then face them to the right or to the left, as his
Сс
rout

204
NEW SYSTEM OF
rout directs, making his rear ſubdiviſions to march up
and join his front, and in that order he is to purſue
his march: Now, ſhould be find himſelf on the point
of being attacked, he is then to halt, cloſe up his files,
,
face outwards from the centre, and ſtand cloſe back to
back, giving directions to thofe files, as far as three
deep, in the front and rear of his column, to face
occafionally to the attack, and receive it; and thus,
by a judicious management of thoſe files, he will find
himſelf capable to bafile the efforts of a conſiderable
body of cavalry ; or at the worſt, to make them pay
far dearer for their defeat of him, then it will prove
of account to them.
And now having offered ny ſcheme how the ſquare
is to be formed occaſionally out of any number of bat.
talions, I ſhall, in purſuance of that plan, go on with
the exerciſe.
1. Battalion, by Diviſion, to the right wheel
and form the Column. March.
Direction.
Each diviſion is to whcel a quadrant,
II. Column. Halt.
Dire&tion.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
III. Column. March
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off, beginning the march with
the left foot.
IV. Column,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
205
IV. Column, form Diviſion, prepare to form
Grand Diviſion.
DireElion.
Each diviſion is to hold itſelf in readineſs.
V. Column, from Diviſion, form Grand Di-
viſion.
Direction.
The firſt or leading diviſion is to keep moving on.
The even-numbered diviſions, viz. the ſecond, fourth,
fixth, and eighth, are on their march to incline to the
right, to the length of the breadth of a ſubdiviſion, or
to half the breadth of their preſent rank; while the
odd-numbered diviſions, viz. the third, fifth, ſeventh,
and ninth, incline likewiſe to their left; and on having
obtained a fufficient inclination, then each of thoſe di-
vifions to march directly forward with a quick pace,
and join its immediate leading diviſion on the left.
And as to the tenth diviſion, it is, as the firſt diviſion
had done, to keep marching on in the line of its firſt
direction.
VI. Column Halt.
.
a
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
VII. Column, prepare to form the Square.
Direction.
The whole is to be in readineſs.
VIII. Column,

206
NEW SYSTEM OF
VIII. Column, form the Square.
Direction.
The firſt or leading divifion is to fubdivide, and face
to the right and left outwards from the centre, the
right ſubdivifion of which is to march and cover the
right angle of the front face, while the left fubdiviſion
marches likewiſe to cover the left angle of the fame
face. The firſt or leading grand divifion is to halt, and
make the front face. The ſecond grand diviſion is to
halt with the firſt, and then wheel to the right, and
form the right face, letting its left flank be juſt covered
by the right flank of the front face. The third grand
diviſion is to keep moving on, and when it arrives at
the ground from whence the ſecond had wheeled, it
is then to wheel to the left, and make the left face ;
and afterwards to incline a little to the right, ſo as to
cauſe its right flank juſt to cover the left flank of the
front face. The fourth and laſt grand divifion, which
.
is to make the rear face, is to continue marching on,
till it comes to join the flanks of the ſecond and third
grand diviſions, inclining then ſo much to the left, as
to bring its right flank to be juſt covered by the right
flank of the right face, and its left to cover likewiſe
the left flank of the left face. And laftly, the tenth,
or rear diviſion is, as the firſt had done, to fubdivide
and likewiſe cover the angles of the rear face.
IX. Square, face outwards,
Direction.
The rear face, with the two platoons or ſubdiviſions
of the tenth diviſion, are to go to the right about,
making

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
207
making their rear their preſent front; and the officers
commanding theſe ſeveral diviſions are likewiſe to
change their fituation, going from their former to their
preſent front.
The ſquare being thus formed, it will be neceſſary,
before I proceed further, to offer a few precautions,
proper to be attended to in the conduct of the ſquare
upon ſervice. Firſt, let it be obſerved, that the ſquare
is only calculated to defend infantry againſt the attack
of cavalry; and that cavalry can no where act but in
an open place or country, conſequently, as the ſquare
is only uſeful in that ſituation, it is therefore to be no
where formed but on entering a plain.
Next, that the ſquare be fo contrived, as not to be
an unneceſſary incumbrance to itſelf, that is, fhould
the ſquare conſiſt of fo great a body of men, as to
make the front face ſo over extenſive as to render the
march extremely troubleſome, either by the interrup-
tion of ground, or by the difficulty of preſerving a
ſtraight compacted front; in this caſe then, it will be
beſt, if what is contained within the ſquare will admit,
to reduce the ſquare to a parallelogram, by taking as
many diviſions from the front and rear faces as may be
thought needful; which diviſions may afterwards be
either added to the right and left faces, or formed into
a reſerve to uſe occaſionally.
And laſtly, let it ever be remembered, that if cavalry
can but penetrate any part of the ſquare, total deſtruc-
tion muſt inevitably follow; therefore, as no diſpofi-
tion whatever requires greater precaution to guard
againſt fo fatal an event, a reſerve muſt ever be ap-
pointed; and that reſerve is, as above, to be taken
from the front and rear faces, and to be poſted as
follows within the ſquare, viz. to appoint a platoon
ta

208
NEW SYSTEM OF
to each angle, and as many to each face, as may be
judged ſufficient for its length; and as theſe platoons
cannot fire three deep, they are to be drawn up in two
ranks, and placed at fix or eight yards diſtance from
the face or angle they are intended to ſuſtain, in order
that they may the more conveniently fire over the heads
of thoſe who are attacked.
X. Square, by your front Face, prepare to
advance.
Direction.
The right face is to face to the left ; as is the left
face to the right. The rear face, with the two pla-
toons which cover the angles of that face, are to come
to the right about ; and then thoſe angle-platoons,
with thofe of the front face, are to bring their inſide
flanks to join the flanks of their reſpective faces which
either lead or follow, and to range themſelves in the
ſame line with them.
XI. Square, March.
.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off together.
XII. Square, Halt.
DireEtion.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
XIII. Square,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
209
XIII. Square, face outwards.
.
Direction.
The right face is to face to the right, as is the left
face to the left. The rear face, with the two angle-
platoons of that face, are to go to the right about ;
and then the four angle-platoons are to poſt themſelves
on their reſpective angles, as before directed.
XIV. Square, by your rear Face, prepare to
retreat.
Direction.
The right face is to face to the right, as is the left
face to the left. The front face, with the two angle-
platoons of that face, are, at the ſame time, to go to
the right about; and then the four angle-platoons are
to join their reſpective faces, as before directed in the
tenth word of command, and to dreſs in a line with
them.
XV. Square. Retreat.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off together.
XVI. Square: Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt,
XVII. Square,

NEW SYSTEM OF
XVII. Square, face outwards.
Direction.
The front face, with the two angle platoons of that
face, are to come to the right about. The right face is
.
to face to the left, as is the left face to the right; and
then the four angle platoons are to poſt themſelves on
their reſpective angles.
Note, In the fame manner as the front and rear
faces have advanced and retreated, ſo are the right arld
left faces occaſionally to perform, having a regard to
the different poſitions of the men.
As the Square is altogether calculated, as has been
before ſaid, for defence againſt cavalry, therefore the
advancing of the Square, either by one face or an-
other, is not to be confidered in any other reſpect
than as the means of proſecuting the intended march
or route, but never with a view to attack.
the other hand, the retreating of the Square, either
by this or that face, is undertaken for no other pur-
poſe but to gain fame wood, incloſure, or defile,
where cavalry cannot act; and even this is only done,
on diſcovering that infantry as well as cavalry are ad-
vancing to attack it, or on ſeeing that part of the ca-
valry are diſmounting to ſupply the place of infantry,
then it will be beſt to retreat betimes to ſome place of
cover neareſt at hand, becauſe no Square can poflibly
reſiſt the united attacks of infantry and cavalry.
And on
XVIII.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE
2 II
XVIII. Square, by grand Diviſion, prepare to
reduce to Column.
Direction.
The rear face and the two angle-platoons of that
face, with the right and left faces, are all to go to the
right about, and the two langle-platoons of the front
face, with thoſe of the rear face, are to face inwards
to each other.
XIX. Square, form the Column March.
Direflion.
The two angle-platoons of the front face, and thoſe
of the rear face, are to march and join each other,
oppoſite the centre of their reſpective faces, and then
face to the front. The ſecond grand diviſion is to
wheel to the left inwards, and then come to the right
about. The firſt or now the leading divifion, is to
march ſlowly forward, followed by the firſt and ſecond
grand diviſions. When the ſecond grand diviſion has
juſt marched clear from the third, the third is then to
wheel to the right inwards, and afterwards come to
the right about, and march after the ſecond : And as
ſoon as the third grand divifion begins to march, the
fourth grand diviſion, with the tenth diviſion in its
rear, are to ſtep off and follow.
Note, When the Square is compoſed of two or more
battalions, the right and left faces are, at the ſame
time, to wheel together inwards, either by divifion or
grand diviſion, as the commanding officer will chooſe
Dd
to

2 12
NEW SYSTEM OF
to direct, and then come to the right about. The di-
viſions of the front face, except that on the right, are
to wheel to the right. Thoſe of the rear face, except
that on the right, are likewiſe to wheel to the right,
as ſoon as thoſe which compoſed the left face have
given fufficient room for that performance, and then
thoſe diviſions of the ſeveral faces are, in the fucceffion
of front, right, left, and rear faces, to fall in one af-
ter another and form the Column. And with reſpect
to the firſt and tenth diviſions of each battalion, they
are to fall in at the front and rear of their reſpective
battalions; and then the whole is to profecute the in-
tended march in that order, obſerving their due diſ-
tances from each other, both in diviſion and battalion.
As the Square is to be only formed upon ſervice on
entering a plain, ſo it is to be reduced on going out of
it. When nothing is to be apprehended from the e-
nemy, the Square is then to be reduced in the fore-
going manner. But ſhould the enemy ftill perſevere
in his views of making an impreſſion, then the rear
part of the Square is to face outwards, and gradually
diminiſh itſelf, till the whole has entered the road
or defile, through which the Column is to march.
But, previous to this operation, ſufficient parties are
to be detached from the front face, and poſted on each
ſhoulder of the defile, to protect the rear of the Square,
when it ſhall begin in Column to enter; and in order
to ſecure ſtill more the rear, thoſe detached parties are
afterwards to march on each flank of the rear diviſion,
that together, they may give a triple fire on any party
of the enemy, who may be ralh enough to venture an
attack.
But ſhould there be contained within the Square a-
ny particular quantity of ammunition, ftores, &c. then
previous

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
213
previous to the reduction of it, the front face is firſt
to open, in order to let the contents paſs through and
go on before ; and afterwards the Square is to break
into Column, as already directed, and follow.
XX. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
XXI. Column to the right About.
Direction.
The whole is to face accordingly.
Note, The intent of going to the right about in this
place, is only to regain the former ground of exerciſe,
XXII. Column. Retreat.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtep off.
XXIII. Column, face to the right About.
Direction.
The whole is to face accordingly; continuing their
march.
XXIV.

214
NEW SYSTEM OF
XXIV. Column, from grand Diviſion, reduce
to Diviſion.
Direction.
The firſt and tenth diviſions are to keep moving on
in their preſent direction, all the even numbered divi-
fions are to advance and incline half the breadth of a
diviſion to the left, or ſo much as juſt to be covered by
the firſt or leading diviſion, while all the odd num-
bered diviſions do at the ſame time recede and incline
likewife to the right, each diviſion of the whole taking
care to obtain its due diſtance, from that which pre-
cedes it.
XXV. Column. Halt.
Direction.
The whole is to ſtand faft.
XXVI. Column, by Diviſion, to the Left,
wheel and form the Line. March.
Direction.
All the diviſions are to wheel accordingly, and to
come up at once to their ground in the line.
XXVII.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
215
XXVII. Line.
Halt.
Direction,
The whole is to ſtand faſt.
The Adjutant having thus perfected the men com-
mitted to his charge in the different arrangements of
the Line, the Column and the Square, he is next to re-
port their condition to his commanding officer, infor-
ming him, at the ſame time, of the ſtate under which
he received them from the Serjeant, that they may af-
terwards be occafionally exerciſed by their commif-
fioned officers, and kept perfect in thoſe points already
taught them.
CHAP.

216
NEW SYSTEM OF
CH A P. V.
The Exerciſe, as it is to be performed by
Signal or Word of Command from the
Major, or from any other Officer.
SECT. I. Of Signals and Operations.
Signals by the Drum.
Operations,
A
Short Roll
Flam
To Arms
The March
The quick March
The Point of War
The Retreat
The Drum ceaſing
Two ſhort Rolls
To caution
To perform any diftinct
Thing.
To form the Line or Bat-
talion.
To advance, except when
intended for a Salute
To advance quick.
To March and Charg e.
To retire.
To halt.
To perform the Flank fir-
ing
To open the Battalion.
To form the Column.
To double Diviſions.
To form the Square.
To reduce the Square to
Column
To make ready and fire.
To ceaſe firing.
To bring or to lodge the
Colours.
SECT.
The Dragoon March
The Grenadier March
The Troop
The long Roll
The Grenadier March
The Preparative
The General
Two long Rolls

MILITARY DISCIPLINE. - 217
SE C T. II. Rules for forming the Battalion.
Note, The following Plan is calculated for a
Battalion, conſiſting of ten Companies.
1. The ſeveral companies are to repair at an ap-
pointed time to the place of exerciſe, or to the ren-
dezvous of the battalion, each company is there to
have a particular place allotted to it, for the afſembling
of itſelf alone, in order as well to avoid confuſion and
diſturbance by mixing with others, as that the ſtate of
the arms, ammunition, accoutrements, clothing, and
every other neceflary, may there be the more conveni-
ently examined and taken an account of.
II. The eldeſt Serjeant preſent is to order the men
to fall in, forming them three deep, according to their
reſpective ranks, and at open order; and to call them
over by his fize-roll, taking an account of all thoſe
who are abſent. Next, he is to complete the files, in
which he is to include the Corporals, ſo as that the
eldeft Corporal may be pofted on the right of the front
rank, the next junior on the right of the rear rank;
and the third Corporal, on the left of the front rank.
Then he is to ſee that the ranks are well fized and
drefled, that the men appear decent and clean, and
provided with all due neceffaries, that the hats or caps
are well worn or put on, that the pouches are proper-
ly placed, and hang at equal heights, and that the
men do ſtand proper, erect, and ſteady, and carry
well their arms.
He is next, with the affiſtance of the
other Serjeants, to examine well the condition of the
arms, accoutrements, &c. which being effected, then
the Serjeants are themſelves to fall in, and take their
Poſts

218
NEW SYSTEM OF
poſts on the flanks, according to feniority as the Cor
porals had done, and on the outfide of them, and to
plant their halberds, but when the battalion is formed,
then the Serjeants are to be poſted in another manner,
as will then be ſhown. And as to the Drummers, they
are to be poſted on the right flank of the company, and
on the outſide of the eldeſt Serjeant, in a line with
the front rank, having their drums braced and flung,
but they are otherwiſe to be poſted when the company
is drawn up in battalion, which will then be directed.
The inſpection of the company being thus finiſhed, and
all other matters being carefully adjuſted, then the
Serjeant is to make a true report in writing of allde fi-
ciencies and irregularities to the Lieutenant or Enſign,
who is to make the review, after which, he is to con-
duct and attend him to the
company.
III. The Lieutenant or Enſign who is to make this
review, is, on his approach to the company, firſt to
falute his men by taking off his hat to them, that they
may on their part, by ſeeing in what degree of reſpect
they are held, conceive the higher opinion of them-
felves, and thence be induced to behave, on all occa-
fions, with a becoming propriety. Such like cere-
monies as theſe never fail of a due return, for men
will always reverence the man the more, who does not
overlook them, on account of their misfortune or low
condition of life; as they will, on the other hand,
ſecretly reſent an haughty neglect of them, and will
long for an opportunity to gratify their pique and dif-
guſt at ſuch treatment. This compliment being paid,
he is next to proceed to an examination of the ſeveral
particulars of this review, ordering a Serjeant with
pen, ink, and paper to attend him, in order to take
an account of whatever he ſhall obſerve is amifs or out
of

MILITARY DISCIPLINE. 210
of order. He is, at the fame time, to carry with him
in his hand, his Serjeant's report, that he may, by re-
ferring to it, ſee the more readily, whether it tallies
with his own obſervations, and how far his Serjeant
has acquitted himſelf; and ſhould he, on inſpection,
find it erroneons, and either the effect of neglect, or
calculated to ſcreen a delinquent, (as is too often the
caſe, and make his officer the detector of faults, and
by that means fling the odium of ſeverity upon him,)
then he is, on any diſcovery of that kind, or the leaſt
appearance of ſuch miſconduct, to have the Serjeant
tried and puniſhed with ſeverity for his offence. For
as a corps of good Serjeants may, with great juſtice and
propriety, be termed the very ſoul of a regiment, it is
the more to be lamented, that the above rule is not
better obſerved, ſince it would infallibly prove the moſt
effectual means to make them diligent and alert in ac-
quitting themſelves. I recommend this method the
more ſtrenuouſly, having myſelf tried the effect of it,
and found it to furpaſs my higheſt expectations.
IV. The reviewing officer having finiſhed his own
inſpections, and made a report to his Captain, then
the Captain is, with his Lieutenant and Enfign, to
poft themſelves at the head of the company in the fol-
lowing order, holding their ſpontoons planted. The
Captain is to be on the right, the Lieutenant on the
left, and the Enſign in the centre. They are to ſtand
on the ſame line, and at three paces advanced before
the front rank, the Captain and Lieutenant placing
themſelves oppoſite to the third file of their reſpective
flanks, The company is to be told off into two divi-
fions; and on the ſignal being given by the Major for
forming the battalion, which is by beating, To Arms,
the Captain is to order his company to march, himſelf
leading the firſt diviſion, the Enſign the ſecond, and
th
Еe

220
NEW SYSTEM OF
a
the Lieutenant bringing up the rear, carrying their
fpontoons underhand. The Drummers are then to fall
in between the front and centre ranks of the firſt or
leading diviſion, and to beat the march. The Ser-
jeants are, on marching off, to ſhoulder their halberds,
letting the ferril-end be uppermoſt; and as they pro-
ceed on their march, they are to attend their reſpective
diviſions, by taking care that the men carry well their
arms, that they ſtep together and carry their bodies
upright, and that the ranks do march even and ſtraight,
and at proper diſtances from each other.
On the ar-
rival of the company at the ground upon which the
battalion is to be formed, the Captain is to draw up
fo as that the right file of his company may be, a full
pace
diſtant from the left-hand file of the company on
his right; and as ſoon as the firft diviſion has halted,
the Drummers are to go into the front, and there beat
to arms during the time the battalion is forming,
The Enſign is to bring up the ſecond diviſion, drawing
it up cloſe on the left of the firſt, and the Lieutenant is
to march up, and take his poſt in the front, as before
directed. The Captain, Lieutenant and Enſign, are,
on drawing up, to face their men, in order to ſee that
they come properly up to their ground, and that the
Serjeants do then proceed to dreſs the ranks and alſo
the files ; and on thus feeing all matters properly ad-
juſted, the Captain is to order his men to ſupport their
arms, by way of eafing their hands; and then the of
ficers are, either by word of command from the Cape
tain himſelf, or by fignal from the Major, to come to
the right about, ſtanding in proper order and holding
their fpontoons planted. The ranks and files being
drefled, the Serjeants are to fall in and form a rank or
line of themſelves in the rear of the company, at three
paces diſtance from the rear rank, oppoſite to their
officers

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
221
officers in front, and then to plant their halberds.
The Drummers are, on being ordered to ceafe beating
in the front to go into the rear and to form a rank
in the rear of their Serjeants, fix paces diſtant from
them, each Drummer placing himſelf oppoſite to the
centre ſpace between each Serjeant, where they are to
repeat occaſionally the different fignals (excepting the
flam) given by the Major or the commanding officer of
the battalion.
V. In forming the battalion, the ſeveral companies
are to be drawn up according to feniority, alternately
from right to left, that is, the eldeſt company is to be
on the right, the next ſenior on the left, and ſo on till
the two youngeſt companies are poſted on each ſide of
the centre.
The reaſon of which is, that as the de-
fence and preſervation of any body of men drawn up,
greatly depend upon the ſkill and addreſs of the offi-
cers commanding on the flanks; and as it muſt be
preſumed that a ſenior officer is pofſefſed of a greater
degree of knowledge and experience than his junior,
therefore the neceflity for poſting the officers by fenio-
rity from right to left, with their companies according
to the above method ; beſides which, there is this
farther advantage, that as both officers and men of
each company are thus diſtinct in themſelves, and of
courſe acquainted with each other, the men therefore
are more cautious of behaving amiſs before one that
knows and can eaſily detect them, than they would
were they commanded by a perſon who is a ſtranger
to, and not fo capable to recollect them, by which
means they become not only more ſubordinate, but
they act with more unanimity and reſolution, there
being withal, among all diſtinct bodies of men, a fpi-
rit of emulation which continually ſpurs them on to vie
with each other, which they feldom are inſpired with
when they become a mixed body.
For

2 2 2
NEW SYSTEM OF
For the foregoing reaſons then, I fhall confider
every company not having an acting Captain, whether
by eſtabliſhment or abſence, as a junior company :
and therefore thoſe companies, whoſe Captains are
preſent, are to be poſted by ſeniority from right to
left alternately of the battalion, eſpecially on ſervice.
But as the two centre companies have more immedi-
ately the charge of the colours, and as that ſituation is
eſteemed another poſt of honour; the Colonel's com-
pany is therefore in preference to be poſted on the
right, and the Lieutenant-Colonel's on the left of the
centre where the colours are ſtationed.
By the above diſpoſition it appears that I do not
fubdivide the grenadiers according to cuſtom, in or-
der to cover the flanks of the battalion ; and my rea-
fon for which is, that it is in my opinion a very bad
practice, for it is evident, that a diviſion or ſeparation
of the officers and men muſt not only weaken the
whole as well as the parts, but be of inſufficient
weight for the places at which they are poſted ;---al-
ways preferring ſervice to parade.
VI. The companies being thus drawn up, and the
Captains, Lieutenants and Enfigns poſted in the front
of the battallion, or at the head of their reſpective
companies, as before directed, the Colonel is then to
take his poft at the head of the battalion, and oppoſite
to the centre of it, at the diſtance of five paces ad-
vanced before the line of officers. The Lieutenant-
Colonel is likewiſe to poſt himſelf three paces to the
right of the Colonel, and two retired from him, or
three advanced before the line of officers, each holding
his fpontoon planted. The Major is to be mounted
on horſeback, for the more expeditious means of exe-
cuting or diſpatching the orders of the Colonel, and
for correcting the more readily whatever he may him-
ſelf

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
223
re-
ſelf fee amifs. He is to poft himſelf oppoſite to the
Colonel in the front, and to face the battalion, with
his ſword drawn: his diſtance from the battalion is to
be fuch, as that his ſituation from either flank may be
equal to the extent of the battalion ; he is there to ex-
erciſe the battalion, having the Drum Major to attend
him, to make the neceſſary fignals. But when the
battalion is to be reviewed by a general officer, he is,
on having given the word of command to the batta-
lion, viz. preſent your arms, the uſual falute on
ceiving ſuch General, to take his poſt then at the head
of the battalion, three paces to the left of the Colonel,
and in a line with the Lieutenant Colonel; and after
he has made his perfonal falute with his ſword, he is to
return to his former poſt in the front. The Adjutant
is alſo to be on horſeback for the purpoſe likewiſe of
diſpatch, in the duties I fall hereafter point out,
He is alſo to have his ſword drawn, and to poſt him-
ſelf in the rear of the battalion, and oppoſite to the
Major in front, where he is to ſee good order pre-
ferved, and to give timely intimations to the men of
whatever is intended to be done, having the Serjeant
Major to attend and affift him. See the annexed figure.
But when the battalion is only formed for exerciſe,
and not for review, the Colonel is then not to poſt
himſelf as above directed, but to place himſelf without
his ſpontoon, cloſe to the Major in front, that he may
there the more conveniently direct him as he ſhall find
occafion; then the Lieutenant Colonel is to fupply his
place, by poſting himſelf in his room, at the head of
the battalion.
VII. Matters being thus far regulated and ſettled,
the colours are next to be ſent for, which are to be
brought to the battalion by the Enſigns of the Colo-
nel's and Lieutenant Colonel's companies, or by ſuch
other

224
NEW SYSTE OF
other Enſigns as ſhall be appointed in their room.
For this purpoſe, the Major is to make the neceſſary
ſignal, being two mort rolls of the drum, on which
the Enfigns for the colours are, firſt, to recover their
fpontoons, face to the right, and march. They are
to repair to the grenadier company, and to march in
the rear of the line of officers, or between them and the
front rank of the battalion. On their arrival at the
grenadier company, they are to poſt themſelves in the
line of officers, at the head of the eſcort, or of the left
hand diviſion of the Grenadiers ; and then to face to
the front and plant their fpontoons.
This eſcort is to be commanded by the firſt Lieute-
nant of Grenadiers, with the appointment of two Ser-
jeants and one Drummer. One Serjeant is to be poſted
on the right of the front rank; and the other on the
left of the rear rank, and the Drummer between the
front and centre ranks, who is to beat the Grenadier
march. The Lieutenant is to poſt himſelf three paces
advanced before the Enfigns; and on having received
his orders from his Captain, and being made acquaint-
ed by his Serjeant that the eſcort is ready, he is to face
about, and to give the following words of command,
viz. Eſcort, handle your arms, March.
Note, The Lieutenant is, as before, to carry his
fuzee advanced in his left hand, and in the fame man-
ner as the Soldiers do their firelocks, when they are
ſo ordered. The Enfigns are to carry their ſpontoons
underhand or trailed; and the Serjeants their halberds
Shouldered.
When the Lieutenant arrives at the place where he is
to receive the colours, he is then to give the following
words of command, viz. Eſcort, halt ; at which the
drum ceaſes, the Enfigns plant their fpoptoons, and
the Serjeants their halberds, Fix your bayonets;
Shoulder :

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
225
Shoulder ; and then the Lieutenant is to fix likewiſe his
bayonet. On the colours being brought out and deli-
vered to the Enfign, he is again to ſay, by way of fa.
luting the colours, preſent your arms, at which the
Drummer is to beat a march, and himſelf to take off
his hat or to put his hand to his cap. The colours
being thus received and held advanced by the Enſigns,
he is to order the drum to ceaſe, and then to give the
following words of command, viz. Eſcort, Shoulder.
Advance your arms.
March. On which the Drum-
mer is again to beat the march.
On the arrival of the colours within forty or fifty
paces of the battalion, the Major is, by way of caution,
or of fixing the attention of the battalion to his orders,
to cauſe a ſhort roll of his drum, which is to be an-
fwered by all the other Drummers, after which he is
to give the following words of command, Battalion
handle your arms. Preſent your arms.
After which
his own Drummer is to beat the march, which is the
fignal for all the other Drummers drawn up, as be-
fore directed in the rear of the battalion, to begin alſo
to beat.
The Lieutenant commanding the eſcort is to ſhape
his march fo, as to bring his right flank almoſt to join
the left of the battalion, and in the fame direction with
it. On his approach to which, the Major is again to
fay, Battalion, face to the left; and then the Lieute-
nant is to ſay, on bringing up his men to the flank of
the battalion, Eſcort halt. Face to the right. March.
On which the Major is again to ſay, Battalion, face to
the right, or to the front. The eſcort having faced and
marched, the men are to march by files, each rank
marching in the middle ſpace between thoſe of the
battalion, in order that they may the more conveni-
ently join thoſe of their reſpective company, that is,
the

226
NEW SYSTEM OF
the Lieutenant is himſelf to marsh between the line of
officers and the front rank of the battalion, his front
Tank is to march between the front and centre ranks,
the Drummer following and beating, his centre rank
is alſo to paſs between the centre and rear ranks, and
his rear rank between the rear rank of the battalion
and the line of Serjeants. The Enfigns with the co-
lours are to march after each other in the front of the
line of officers, keeping at four paces diſtant from that
line, and as many aſunder. Each officer is to falute
them as they paſs by him, by taking off his hat, which
is to be done in confideration of the high honour and
truſt they are inveſted with, in carrying the colours of
their country, and they are, on their part, to ac-
knowledge the attention given them, by taking off their
hats in return.
On their approach to the centre of the battalion,
they are to incline inwards, ſo as to fall into the line
of officers, where they are to poſt themſelves four
paces from cach other, and in the rear of the Colonel,
and then to face to the front, and to ſtand in proper
order, holding the colours advanced, at which the
Major is to order the battalion to ſhoulder.
The Lieutenant of the eſcort is, on having returned
and joined his company, to give the following words
of command, Serjeants and Drummer, to your former
poſts. Eſcort, front. Shoulder. Return your bayonets.
Shoulder. After which he is to return his own bayo-
net, and face to the front; and then to go up and
make his report to his Captain, and return to his for-
mer poft.
Note, Whenever the Grenadiers or any party of
them are ordered to fix their bayonets, the officers are
alſo to fix theirs at the ſame time, and likewiſe to unfix
with them.
A Sketch

MILITARY DISCIPLINE. 227
a
A Sketch of a Battalion, conſiſting of ten companies, in each fixty nine private and three corporals,
making in the whole 720 men rank
and file, drawn up in reviewing order, and according to ſeniority.
The Front of the Battalion.
O
Reference.
D
A. The Colonel
F. The Front Rank
M. The Adjutant
B. The Lieutenant Colonel G. The Centre Rank
N. The Serjeant Major
C. The Major in Battalion H. The Rear Rank
0. The Signal Drummer
D. ditto at Exerciſe
I. The Line of Serjeants P, The Colours
E. The Line of Officers
K. The Line of Drummers
1, 2, 3, 4, &c. Shew the Companies as they are drawn up by Seniority.
A
Ff
C
ロロ
​B
ロロロロロ​ロロロロロロロ​E.
ロロロロロ​ロロロロロロロ
​2
4
4
6
8
10
P
9
7
5
3
I
F.
G.
-H.
0
ロロロロロロ
​II II II II II II
опи
II II
II -
III.
пд К.
A
II
TI
II
U
M
II
SECT
N
EZ

228
NEW SYSTEM OF
SECT. III. Rules for telling off the Battalion,
and for poſting the Officers, both at Exerciſe
and for Action.
а
1. Each company is to be kept ſeparate and undi-
vided, and to be held a diſtinct divifion in itſelf; and
therefore, the word diviſion, and the word company,
are here to be regarded as ſynonymous terms; and as
the battalion is to conſiſt of ten companies, including
the grenadiers, each company is to be told off and
conſidered as a diſtinct platoon in itſelf, which will of
courſe make ten in the whole.
In the telling off a battalion into platoons for firing,
two extremes ought carefully to be avoided, viz. that
it be not into fo great a number as will cauſe ſuf-
penſion of fire, nor into fo few as will create hurry,
confuſion, and inaccuracy. When the number of
platoons are too many, that which had at firſt began
the fire will be for ſome confiderable time loaded and
ready, before it will come to its turn to fire again in
fucceffion. Here then lies a manifeſt error, ſince the
oftener a platoon can conveniently fire in any given
period or order of time, the greater execution it will
confequently occafion; and on the other hand, ſhould
the number of platoons be too few, there will not then
be ſufficient time for each to load and fire again in
due rotation ; and by thus ftinting men in point of
time, it will only ſerve to hurry and confound them,
and to render their fire ineffectual. Hence then, upon
a view of both extremes, a medium becomes evidently
neceflary; that is, to find out a method that will avoid
either extreme, and be ſufficient in itſelf. For this
reaſon I have made choice of the above number of
platoons

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
229
on.
platoons preferable to any other, having conſtantly
obſerved, that the time which each will take up in
priming, loading, and making ready after it has fired,
will be nearly equal to the time that the other remain-
ing nine platoons will ſpend in firing in their due or-
der of fuc on, or before it will come to the turn of
him who had at firſt fired to fire again.
Next, let the platoons or companies be numbered
in fucceffion, from the right to the left of the battali-
The grenadier company is to be No. I, the next
2 ; and ſo on to that on the left of all, which is, of
courſe, to be No. 10, carefully informing each com-
pany with its reſpective number, Then all the odd
numbers are to make the firſt firing, and are to anſwer
each other alternately from right to left ; as thus, 1,9
---3,7---5 ; and then the even numbers, which are to
conſtitute the ſecond firing, are to begin and anſwer
one another likewiſe from left to right ; as thus,
10,2---8,4---6; and ſo on in fucceffion, round after
round, as long as the firing ſhall be thought fit to
continue.
The reaſon for thus telling off the battalion into two
firings, and for making the feveral platoons to anſwer
each other alternately, is, that each part of the battali-
on may by that means the better fuftain the other,
that is, that the part which is loading, and of courſe
defenceleſs, may, in the mean time, be protected by
that which is loaded or ready to fire.
But as the above method, however fimple in itſelf,
cannot in action be perfectly well obſerved, on account
of the great variety of incidents which frequently oc-
cur to prevent it; and as one of my principal views in
writing this treatiſe, was to endeavour at finding out
Luch rules as could be rendered moſt practical on fer-
vice,

230
NEW SYSTEM OF
vice, I ſhall therefore require no longer an obſervance
of the above method, even at exerciſe, than only for
the firſt round, after which, each platoon officer is,
on having fired, to go on as uſual with his priming
and loading, and to fire again as ſoon as he is ready,
regarding nothing more in the mean time, but the
good order of his men, the fituation of the enemy,
and the ſignal of the drum. For as the time of firing
one round is calculated for the time of priming, load-
ing and making ready; and as each platoon will, with
one another, prime and load in equal times, therefore
there can never happen that irregularity with which
any foldier will be diſpleaſed; for though it ſhould fall
out, that two platoons may, from ſome interruption or
other, fire together, it matters but little, it being in
itſelf ſo much the more like action, and of courſe the
fitter to convey an idea of ſervice, and to habituate
men to it betimes; yet even this ſmall incorrectneſs is
infinitely preferable to to our prefent abominable and
unfoldier-like practice, viz. of an officer's peeping,
watching, and hurrying his men, that he may fire again
in his preciſe turn. By this means his attention is
diverted from his platoon, the moſt meterial confider-
ation; he becomes perplexed himſelf, and his men, by
the want of due inſpection, fall into irregularity and
confuſion; and to this I chiefly attribute the cauſe of
that immenſe diſorder to which a battalion is ever ſub-
ject in action, for the officer in endeavouring to obſerve
the forms he has ever been inſtructed in and accuſtom-
ed to, and finding them impracticable, and having then
no other reſource or guide to conduct him, confufion
of courſe muſt ever be the conſequence. In ſhort, the
only beauty and good order which I ſhall eſteem in
firing, are to lock well up, to come to a cool preſent, and
to wait with patience for the word of command.
II. The
a

MILHT ARY DISCIPLINE.
231
II. The battalion being thus told off, and each pla-
toon informed with its due order of firing, the Major
is then to give the following words of command.
Officers, take your Poſts of Action.
Direction.
Each officer is to recover his fpontoon, and the
whole to go to the right about.
Officers, March
Direction.
The whole line of officers, excepting thoſe who are
to command platoons, are to march through the inter-
vals of the platoons into the rear, to the diſtance of
three paces beyond the line of fergeants, or between
them and the line of drummers. Thoſe officers are
to place themſelves oppoſite to the middle ſpace between
each ferjeant, or directly before the drummers, that
they may the more conveniently direct and obſerve the
behaviour of their men. The Lieutenant Colonel is
to march through the centre interval of the battalion
into the rear, and to the diſtance of twenty paces be-
yond the line of drummers; the major is to follow
him, and to poſt himſelf on his right hand, and the
adjutant on his left, each a little retired from him,
where they are to be affiftants to him in regulating any
diforders which may happen in the rear, and alſo in
keeping up the battalion cloſe and compact. The
colonel is to poſt himſelf in the centre interval of the
battalion, and in a line with the front ránk, having
behind him an aid-de-camp to diſpatch his orders;
and

232
NEW SYSTEM OF
and behind him is to be the drum-major, to make the
neceſſary fignals. The captains, or officers command-
ing platoons of the right wing, are to poſt themſelves
in the intervals on the right of their platoons, and in a
line with the front rank, and thoſe of the left wing are
to do the ſame, but with this difference, that they fall
in on the left of their reſpective platoons. The rea-
ſon of which is this, that the officers of both wings may
the more conveniently, when they come to turn to
their men to command them, have a reciprocal view
how matters go towards the centre, and on the flanks
of each other, to the end that they may direct their fire
accordingly, and fuftain the better that part which may
be puſhed or moſt attacked.
By this difpofition of the officers, it may be obſerved,
that they are all in general pofted where they can pof-
fibly be the moſt ſerviceable, either to command, to
controul, or to affift, by which means the battalion
will be kept cloſe and compact, and the men to their
duty. The colours, which before had fettered and
weakened the battalion, now add ſtrength and freedom
to it, being placed in the rear in the line of officers,
where they are not only fufficiently conſpicuous, and
cqually or more ſecure, but the officers who carry
them are left in a condition to be occaſionally aflifting,
in keeping up the battalion, and in preferving good
order in the rear of it; and with this further advant-
age, that as there is now no reſerve as before for the
colours, the whole of courſe engages, and by that
means the centre of the battalion becomes ſo much the
ſtronger, and of courſe the poſt of commanding officer
rendered more ſecure and unmoleſted.
But as the above diſpoſition is calculated for ſervice,
and for poſting the officers where they can beſt fuper-
intend

MILITARY DISCIPLINE, 233
intend and direct their men, and as the battalion is
now at exerciſe, the Major is therefore to remain at
his former poft of exerciſe in the front, with the com-
manding officer near him, to direct him as he ſhall
think fit and ſee occaſion.
Officers, front.
Direction.
The officers are all to come to the right about, and
to plant their ſpontoons, excepting the officers com-
manding platoons, who are to carry their fpontoons
advanced, and inſtead of coming to the right about,
are only to turn to their men, that they may the better
direct and obſerve their behaviour.
But when the line is ordered to advance, thoſe offi-
cers commanding the platoons are then to head their
platoons, by advancing four paces before them, and to
carry their fpontoons trailed or under hand.
.
And in
order to keep their intervals open at the ſame time
ready for them to fall in again when they come to
engage, each officer is to call up a fergeant out of the
rear to preſerve that interval till he returns, and then
thoſe ſerjeants are to fall back to their former poſts.
My reaſon for the above diſpoſition is this: In the
firſt place it ſerves to animate the men, by ſeeing their
officers advancing before them, and leading them on
intrepidly to action. Next, it ſerves to keep the men
in order, and reſtrain them to the proper moment.
And laſtly, it is the only expedient to make the line
advance even and in good order. The ſignal for this
operation is, the drum's beating a march, and on the
drum's ceaſing, and beating a preparative, the officers
are to fall in as above directed.
A ſketch

234
E W SYSTEM OT
N to
a
A Sketch of a Battalion formed for action or exerciſe, with the ranks at whole diſtance or open order.
o
Reference.
D
I
2
5
2
2
A. The Colonel.
G. The Front Rank.
N. The Line of Drummers.
B. The Lieutenant Colonel. H. The Centre Rank.
0. The Drum-Major at Exerciſe.
C. The Major in Action.
I. The Rear Rank.
P. The Colours.
D. Ditto and Exerciſe.
K. The Line of Serjeants. R. The Drum-Major, Signal
E. The Adjutant.
L. An Aid-de-camp.
Drummer.
E. F. &c. Platoon Officers. M. The Line of Officers.
1, 2, 3, &c. Platoons numbered. The fractional figures indicate the different firings, and their order
of fucceffion.
F JFS
F 3
Ž F F ŞAŞ F4
F F을 ​FS F.
9
G.
8
7
6 L
5 4 3
H.
R
I.
K.
M.
Р
a
B
E
C
2
IO
2
I
]
.
D
Do
D
D
DON.
D
了
​I. Bat-

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
235
Signals.
Words of Command.
Reference.
W. C. I.
a
1. Battalion, take care to perform c. iii. s. 2.
Sort Roll. your parade exerciſe.
Note. Though all foldiers muſt
at firſt learn their exerciſe in ſmall
ſquads by word of command, yet
when they afterwards come to forin
in battalion or to join in larger corps,
it will be found a very difficult mat-
ter to exerciſe them in that manner,
becauſe there are but very few voices
which are ſo clear and ſtrong in
themſelves as to be diſtinctly heard,
even at a diſtance, neceſſary to exer-
ciſe a fingle battalion; and beſides
which, the very difference of voice
in different people will frequently
cauſe no leſs a difference in the per-
formance of the exerciſe. To obvi-
ate then theſe impediments, it would
be beſt to exerciſe the men by beat
of drum, fince the found is more
uniform, and can be heard at a much
greater diſtance; and beſides this
advantage, there is one ftill more
weighty, and that is, it will natu-
rally oblige ſoldiers to reflect more
on what they are to do, in order
that they may not be detected in a
neglect of their duty, by miſtaking
or doing one thing for another, and
puniſhed afterwards for that offence,
by which means they will in the end
come to acquire ſuch an habit of
ruminating on what they have to
do, and of carrying their ideas be-
yond the preſent moment, as will of
courſe cauſe them to be altogether
attentive, filent and ſteady in all
their operations. And for theſe
reaſons
a
GS

236
NEW SYSTEM OF
Signals.
Words of Command.
Reference.
reaſons I ſhall prefer ſignals by
the drum, after troops are pro-
perly grounded and well in-
ftructed, to any oral delivery
whatever, fince no voice, how-
ever good, can be near ſo effi-
cacious, and more eſpecially in
time of action, to which great
end all ſoldiers ſhould be care-
fully and judiciouſly trained.
Note, Between each ſignal,
there is to be a pauſe or ceffa-
tion, in order that the men may
the better diſtinguiſh the dif-
ferent beatings, and have the
more time to recollect them-
ſelves.
Note, In all operations, the
officers and ferjeants are con-
ftantly to proceed and keep
with their reſpective diviſions,
as are the drummers, except
otherwiſe diſpoſed.
Note, The following letters
are characters of abbreviation,
which are to be remembered,
viz. c. ftands for chapter, s. for
ſection, w. C. for word of com-
mand, a. for article, and r. for
rule.
2 Recover your muſkets
3 Reſt your muſkets
4. Order your muſkets
5 Ground your muſkets
6 Take up your muſkets
7 Reſt your muſkets
8 Shoulder your muſkets
9 Secure your muſkets
10 Shoulder your muſkets
2d
3d
4th
5th
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
}'lam
Flam
6th
7th
8th
9th
Toth
11. Fix

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
237
Signals.
Words of Command.
Reference.
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
20
2 iſt
22d
23d
28th
25th
26th
27th
28th
29th
Short Roll
u Fix your bayonets
IIth
12 Shoulder your muſkets
12th
13 Preſent your arms
13th
14 Face to the right
14th
15 Face to the right
15th
16 Face to the right-about
16th
17 Face to the left
17th
18 Face to the left
18th
19 Face to the left-about
19th
Shoulder your, muſkets
2oth
21 Charge your bayonets
22 Puſh your bayonets
23 Recover your bayonets
24 Shoulder your muſkets
25 Advance your muſkets
26 Shoulder your muſkets
27 Return your bayonets
28 Shoulder your muſkets
29 Support your muſkets
The Field Exerciſe.
30 Battalion take care to per-
from your field exerciſe
31 Handle your muſkets
3oth
32 Fix your bayonets
IIth
33 Shoulder your muſkets
IIth
34 Advance your muſkets
ii. s.
s. 3.W.C.1.
doc.
35 Rear Ranks cloſe to quarter c.ii. s.6.a. 2.W.
diſtance
c. 8 and 9.
Note, The officers, ſerjeants
and drummers in the rear are
likewiſe to move up at the ſame
time, taking care to preſerve
their former diſtance from the
rear rank.
36 Take care to prime and load c. iii. s. iii.&c.
W. C. 2, 3, 4,
37 Prime and load
5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
and 10.
38 Bai-
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
C.
Flama
Short Roll
Flam
GS 2

238
NEW SYSTEM OF
.
3d
4th
5th
7th
Signals. Words of Command. Reference.
Short Roll. 38 Battalion, by files, prepare c. IV. S. 2.
to take other ground
W. C. 2.
Flam
39 Battalion. Take ground
to the right
Flam
40 Battalion. March.
Flam
41 Battalion Halt.
Flam
42 Battalion. Front.
6th
Flam
43 Battalion. Take Ground
to the left.
Flam
44 Battalion. March.
Flam
45 Battalion. Halt.
Flam
46 Battalion. Front.
Toth, c.
Short Roll.
47 Battalion.
Prepare to
advance.
The March. 48 Battalion. Advance to
the Charge.
Note, The Colonel and
officers commanding platoons
diviſions, are
their platoons and lead on
the battalion, as directed in
Chap. V. s.
3
R. W.
C. the laft, &c.
Drum ceaſes. 49 Battalion. Halt,-ibid.
Preparative. 50 Battalion. Make ready C.iii.l.3.W.C.II,
or
to head
2.
and fire.
16,19,23,24.
Note, No. 1. or the firſt
platoon or divifion is to begin
the firing, and to be followed
by the other platooons in fuc-
ceffion, as directed in Chap.
V. S. R. I; and after each
has fired, it is to go on with
its priming and loading,
except ordered to the contra-
ry. And the firing is to
continue till the General
beats, whether, ftanding,
advancing, or retreating.
The

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
239
Reference.
Signals. Words of Command.
The March. 51 Battalion. Advance on.
The quick
52 Battalion. Advance
March. quicker.
The Point of 53 Battalion. Charge with
War.
Bayonet.
Note, At this fignal the
battalion is to ruſh out with
impetuofity, the firing being
ſuſpended for the time; and
as the rear ranks cannot then
likewiſe charge with bayo-
net, without annoying the
leading rank, the front rank
only is therefore to uſe the
bayonet, the other two
ranks remaining a reſerve, to
ſuſtain occafionally the firſt,
either with their bayonets or
their fire.
Drum ceaſes. 54 Battalion. Halt.
The Retreat. 55 Battalion. Retreat.
Note, As every retreat
does convey no leſs an idea of
defeat, than it magnifies the
the fuperiority and rage of
the enemy, the beſt troops
therefore will naturally, un-
der theſe ſurmiſes and appre-
henfions, feek fafety by
flight, except reſtrained by
the greateſt care and moſt a-
nimating conduct of their offi-
This talk then is, in a
great meaſure, the province
of thoſe who are poſted in the
rear, they being by their fi-
tuation the moſt capable of
that ſervice; but much will
nevertheleſs depend upon the
C. III. f. 3. w.
c. 30, & 31.
cers.
judgment

240
NEW SYSTEM OF
Reference.
Signals. Words of Command.
judgment of the comman-
ding officer, in adjuſting the
order and time of retreat.
For this laſt purpoſe, the
movement of the Battalion,
ought never to be performed
with a quicker pace, than
what will preſerve regularity
and good order, and withal
ſuch as may ſerve by the fore
mality of it, as well to diſpel
the dread ariſing from the o-
peration, as to compel the e-
nemy to obſerve in his mea-
fures both reſerve and cau-
tion, left a too forward pre-
Yumption might ſnatch from
him the advantage he had
juſt before gained.
Drum ceaſes, Battalion. Halt.
The March. 57 Battalion. Advance.
Drum ceaſes. 58 Battalion. Halt.
The General. 59 Battalion. Geaſe firing.
Short Roll. 60 Battalion. Prepare to
give your Flank-Firing,
Two ſhort 61 Battalion, by Diviſion,
Rolls. half wheel to the right.
March.
Preparative. 62 Battalion. Make ready
and Fire.
Note, Each Platoon is, on
having fired, to wheel back
to its former ground, and on
being loaded, it is again to
wheel out as before.
TheGeneral. 63 Battalion. Ceaſe firing.
Two ſhort 64 Battalion, by Diviſion,
Rolls. half wheel to the left.
March.
56
25th
C. IV. S. 2.
W. C. 18,
,
and 19
2 iſt and 22d.
lefto
Preparative

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
241
27.
Signals. Words of Command. References
Preparative. 65 Battalion.
65 Battalion. Make ready
and Fire.
Note, During the continu-
ance of this firing, both to
the right and left as above,
the Officers, Serjeants, and
Drummers in the Rear, are
to remain in their reſpective
lines.
TheGeneral. 66 Battalion. Ceaſe firing.
23d, &c.
Short Roll. 67 Battalion. Prepare to o-
24th
pen at the Centre.
Dragoon 68 Battalion, open at the 25, 26,
March.
Centre. March.
and 28.
Short Roll. 69 Battalion. Prepare to
29th
advance in your open Order.
The March. 70 Battalion. Advance.
Note, The Enligns with
the Colours, are to wheel,
&c. with
their reſpective
Diviſions, the one to the
right, the other to the left.
And the Colonel is to remain
upon his preſent ground in
the centre of the great inter-
val or opening, the better to
obferve what paſſes, and to
give in conſequence, the ne-
ceſſary orders and directions.
Drum ceaſes. 71 Battalion. Halt.
Short Roll.
72 Battalion. Prepare to
cloſe at the Centro.
To Arms. 73 Battalion, cloſe at the
Centre. March.
Drum ceaſes. 74 Diviſions, that cloſed,
dress.
Short Roll.
75 Battalion, by Files,
C. IV. S. 3.
prepare to form the Co-
W. C. 2.
lumn at the Centre.
Grenadier
32d
33d
34th

242
NEW SYSTEM OF
Signalsa
Reference.
Grenadier
March,
3d
Words of Command.
76 Battalion, form the Co-
lumn. March.
Note, As the Column is to
be a ſolid compact body, and
confequently unweildly in it-
felf, it ought therefore to
have as few encumbrances,
and interftices left in it as
poffible. For which reaſon
the Drummers are now to be
poſted in the rear, or oppo-
ſite to the ſide attacking or
attacked, and drawn up in
ranks by themſelves, except-
ing the Signal Drummer,
who is always to attend the
Colonel or commanding offi-
The Officers and Ser-
jeants who were poſted in the
rear of the Line, are now to
make a File of themſelves,
between each diviſion of the
Column. The right Enfign
with the colours is to be
poſted in the interval be-
tween the 1ſt and 2d Grand-
diviſions, as is likewiſe the
left Enfign, between the 3d
and 4th Grand-diviſions, and
in a line with the Colonel ;
who is pofted, as before,
between the 2d and 3d Grand-
divifions, and to head the Co-
lumn whenever it advances.
The Major is to head the gre-
nadiers in all ſort of columns,
and to lead the attack, and
the Lieutenant Colonel and
Adjutant to bring up the
Rear.
cer.
Drum

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
243
Reference.
4th
5th
7th
8th
Signals. Words of Command.
Drum ceaſes. 77 Column. Halt.
The March. 78 Column. Advance to the
Charge.
Drum ceaſes. 79 Column. Halt.
Flam
80 Columii
. Face to Flank
.
Attack.
Note, The Enfigns with
the Colours, are not to face,
but are to remain with the
two Center-grand-divifions.
The Point of 81 Flank-diviſions.
March
War.
and Charge.
Note, This Charge is to
be made with the Bayonet
only, as before directed in
the Line. The right Charge
is to be conducted by the
Lieutenant Colonel; as is
the left, by the Major; and
the Adjutant is to remain as
before,
Drum ceaſes. 82 Flank diviſions. Halt.
Short Roll. 83 Battalion. Prepare to ree
treat hy Column.
The Retreat. $4 Column. Retreat.
Note, The Colonel and
Major are to remain in their
preſent ſtations; and the
Lieutenant Colonel is to lead.
the Retreat.
Drum ceaſes, 85 Column. Halt.
Short Roll. 86 Column. Prepare to form
tbe Line.
To Arms. 87 Column Form the Line.
Note, The Officers, Ser-
jeants, and Drummers, are
now to return to their for-
mer poſts in the line.
Drum ceaſes. 88 Battalion. Halt.
Hh
10th
11th
13th
14th
Flam

244
NEW SYSTEM OF
Reference
17th
18th
own
Signals. Words of Command.
Flam 89 Battalion. Face to the
Front.
Short Roll, 90 Battalion, by Ranks,
prepare to form the Co-
lumn at the Centre.
Grenadier 91 Battalion, form the Co-
March. lumn. March.
Note, The Enfigns with
the colours do not on this
occafion alter their fituation;
but are to march cloſe in the
rear of their
diviſions :
as are alſo the fubaltern Offi-
cers and Serjeants in the rear
of theirs, formed into one
rank, and the Lieutenant Co-
lonel, Major, and Adjutant
with the Drummers, are to
be poſted as directed in the
laft column.
Drum ceaſes. 92 Column Halt.
To Arms. 93 Column. Form to front
Attack.
Preparative. 94 Battalion.
94 Battalion. Make ready
and fire.
The Retreat. 95 Battalion. Retreat by
Column.
Drum ceafes. 96 Column. Halt.
Short Roll. 97 Column. Prepare to form
the Line.
To Arms. 98 Column. Form the Line.
Drum ceaſes. 99 Battalion. Halt,
Flam
100 Battalion. Face to the
Front.
Short Roll. 101 Battalion, by Files
and Ranks, prepare to
form the Column at the
Genire.
Grenadier 102 Battalion. Form the.Com
228
23d
24th, &c
26th
27th
29th
3oth
March. lumn.
3ift
Note,

MILITARY DISCIPLINE.
245
Reference.
Signals. Words of Command.
Note, The Enligns with
the colours are to march to-
gether cloſe in the rear of
their own inward ſubdivi-
fions, or of that of No. 5.
and 6; the other Subaltern
Officers and Serjeants are to
divide themſelves, fo as that
an half of them may likewiſe
be poſted to each ſubdiviſion
of their reſpective diviſions.
All the other officers are to
be poſted as directed in the
firſt column.
Drum ceaſes. 103 Column. Halt.
The March.
104 Column.
Advance to
the Charge.
35th
36th
Drum ceaſes.
105 Column, Halt.
To Arms. 106 Column. Form to front
and flank Attacks.
Preparative. 107 Battalion. Make ready
and Fire.
Note, As the battalion
now forms three fides of a
{quare, the charge is to be
made, as directed in the two
laſt columns, with reſpect to
front and flank attacks.
TheGeneral. 108 Battalion. Geaſe Firing.
Short Roll. 109 Battalion. Prepare to
retreat by Column.
The Retreat. 110 Columi.
Retreat.
Drum ceaſes. III Column. Halt.
Short Roll. 112 Column.
Prepare to
form the Line.
To Arms. 113 Column. Forn the Line.
Drum ceafes. 114 Battalion. Halt.
Flam
115 Battalion. Face to the
Front.
38th
411
42d
44th
Short

246
NEW SYSTEM OF
Reference.
45th
46th
Signals. Words of Command.
Short Koll. 116 Battalion,by Diviſion,
prepare to form the Column
to the right.
Grenadier 117 - Battalion. Form the Ca-
March.
lumn.
Note, The Enligns with
the colours are to poſt them-
ſelves between the 5th and
6th diviſions. The Major is
to lead the column, poſting
himſelf as directed in the 0-
ther columns. The Colonel
is now
to place himſelf be-
tween the ift and ad divi-
fions. The Lieutenant Colo-
nel is to bring up the rear,
having the Adjutant with
him ; and the Subaltern Offi-
cers and Drummers are to
march in the rear of their re-
fpective diviſions: the Ser-
jeants being now poſted on
the flanks, the better to at-
tend to the order of march.
Drum ceaſes. 118 Column. Halt.
The March.
119 Columin. March
Drum ceaſes.
120 Column.
Halt.
Short Roll.
121 Column, by Diviſion,
prepare to form the Line
to the right.
Note, To whatever flank
of the column the line is to
form, the ſignal-drummer is
to beat on that flank. And
on the diviſions wheeling up,
all the officers, &c. are to
fall out and return to their
reſpective poſts in the line,
paying a regard to their pre-
ſent front.
48th
49th
50th
To

MILITARY DISCIPLIN E.
247
Reference.
5ift, &c.
534
54th, &c.
58th
59th, &c.
Signals.
Words of Command.
To Arms. 122 Column. Form the Line.
Drum ceaſes.
123 Battalion
Hali.
Short Roll. 124 Baitalion, by Diviſion,
prepare to wheel back-
wards to the right and
form the Column.
Grenadier 125 Battalion, form the Co-
March. lumn.
Note, All the officers, &c.
are now to return to their
former poſts in column.
Drum ceaſes. 126 Column. Halt.
The March.
127 Column
March.
Drum ceaſes. 128 Column. Halt.
Short Roll. 129 Column, by Diviſion,
prepare to form the Line
to the Left.
To Arms. 130 Column. Form the Line.
Drum ceaſes.
131 Battalion. Halt.
Short Roll. 132 Battalion, by Diviſion,
prepare to wheel back-
wards to the left, and
form the Column.
Grenadier 133 Battalion. Form the Co-
March. lumn.
Drum ceaſes.
134 Column. Halt.
The March. 135 Column March.
Drum ceaſes. 136 Column. Halt.
Short Roll. 137 Column. by Diviſion,
prepare to form the Line
to your Van.
To Arms. 138 Column. Form the Line.
Drum ceaſes. 139 Battalion. Halt.
Short Roll. 140 Battalion, by Diviſion,
prepare to retreat by Co-
lunin.
The Retreat. 141 Battalion. Retneat.
Drum ceaſes. 142 Column. Halt.
Flam
143 Column. Face to the
right-ahout.
611
62d
66th
67th, &c.
69th
70th, &c.
The

248
NEW SYSTEM OF
Reference
C.IV.S4.-W.4
5th
149 Column.
7th
8th
9th, &c.
loth
Signals. Words of Command.
The March. 144 Column. March.
Drum ceaſes. 145 Column. Halt,
Short Roll. 146 Column, from Diviſion,
prepace to form Grand-
Diviſion.
The Troop. 147 Column. Forn into
Grand-diviſion.
Drum ceaſes. 148 Column. Halt.
Short Roll.
Prepare to
form the Square.
Long Roll.
150 Column. Fornithe Square.
Flam
151 Square. Face outward.
Short Roll.
152 Square, by your Front
Face, prepare to advance.
Note, The Enfigns with
the colours are on this occa-
fion to be in the rear of that
face to which the ſquare ad-
vances, placing themſelves
oppoſite to the centre of it.
The Field-officers and Adju-
are to be within the
ſquare; the Colonel to lead
the advance, the Lieutenant
Colonel the retreat : and all
the other officers, &c. are to
be with their reſpective divi-
fions.
The March. 153 Square. March.
Drum ceaſes. 154 Square.
154 Square. Halt.
Flam
155 Square. Face outward.
.
Short Roll. 156 Square, by your
Face, prepare to retreat.
The Retreat. 157 Square. Retreat.
Drum ceafes. 158 Square. Halt.
Flam
159 Square. Face outward,
Short Roll.
160 Square, by Grand-di-
vifion, prepare to reduce
to Colu71271
tant
13th
rear
14th
15th
19th, &c.
18th
Grenadier

MILITARY DISCIPLINE. 240
Reference.
19th, we
Signals. Words of Command.
Grenadier 161 Square. Form the Cox
March. lumin.
Drum ceaſes. 162 Column. Halt.
To Arms. 163 Column, by Grand-di-)
viſion, to the left wheel
and form the Line.
Drum ceaſes. 164 Line. Halt.
Short Roll. 165 Rear Ranks, prepare to
open to whole difiance.
Dragoon
March.
Direction.
The rear ranks, with all
the officers, &c. in the rear,
are to go to the right-about.
166 Ranks, open to whole
diſtance. March
Direction.
The rear rank is to march
fix
paces,
and the centre rank
three; and the officers, &c.
are likewiſe to march fix
paces, which will bring them
to their former diſtances.
167 Face to the Front.
168 Shoulder your Firelocks.
169 Oficers, take your poſts
in Front. March.
170 Battalion, ſupport your
Flam
Flam
Flam
Flam
11715.
FINI S.


oooooooo
oopoocoon
RULES, MAXIMS,
A N D
OBSERVATIONS,
FOR
Τ Η Ε
GOVERNMENT, CONDUCT,
A N D
DISCIPLINE
OF AN
A R M Y.
M
Xoooooooooooooooooooooo
booooooo

P R E F A C E.
A , regu-
S a ſyſtem of propriety in every branch of a man's
lated and eſtabliſhed principles, laid down either by himſelf
or by others, it then invariably follows, that where fuch a
guide is wanting, and men are left to impoſe the dictates
of their own caprice, diſorder, confufion, ruin, or diſguſt,
muſt ever enſue.
This confideration, has led me to offer the following rules,
maxims, and obſervations; and though I am confident, how
much more complete a treatiſe of this kind could be ren-
dered by many other officers; yet, when I reflected upon
the neceſſity of ſuch a work, and on the advantages which
might from thence accrue to the army, I concluded, that
the motive, which influenced me to the attempt, however
inadequate the taſk ſhould prove to my capacity, would, to
the candid, ſuggeſt an apology in my favonr. .
The following tract is, in a great meaſure, calculated,
Firſt, to enforce obedience, and to preſerve good order.
Next, to point out improprieties, that they may be rejected
and avoided. And, laſtly, to inſtruct fome few officers in a
better and more punctual diſcharge of their duty. And,
if what I have ſo penned, can contribute to theſe great ends,
I fhall account my time not fruitleſsly employed, but well
ſpent, and ſufficiently recompenſed in the fatisfaction it will
afford me.
SECT

$ ECT. I.
253
MORAL OBSERVATION S.
N
deſpiſe you.
OTHING but principle, can conduct a man through life.
2 Bad habits are more difficult to correct than to prevent.
3 Bad conduct will ever produce deſtructive conſequences.
4 One abfurdity or bad action, will ever beget another to lupport it.
5 Though you err tu oblige, yet the perſon you fo oblige, will ſecretly
6 Nothing can juſtify the doing a bad or an ungenerous action.
7 A man gains more enemies by partiality, than hu make friends.
8 He who is unjuſt to others, can never be ſerved with fidelity and
affection.
9 For as much as you will be to others, ſo much will they be to
you.
10 Men will always act according to the idea they conceive of their
own intereſt, or of what they owe to themſelves.
II The ungenerous can have no claim to friendſhip, nor have they a
right to murmur at retaliation.
12 Where a deſire of pleaſing, ſupplants a regard for juſtice, diſgrace
is ever a conſequence.
13 He who is conſcious of his own miſconduct, hates all thoſe who
know it.
14 Too ftri& an attention to ourſelves, often induces us to forget
others.
15 A fordid penury, creates more enemies, than generoſity makes
friends.
16 He, who is vainly profuſe in himſelf, will ever be rapacious on
others.
17 Oeconomy is the parent of greatneſs.
18 He cannot be called avaritious or ſelfiſh, who is diſintereſted.
29 He who is the moſt frugal, will always be the beſt accommo-
dated.
20 He is the moſt juſt to others, who is juſt to himſelf.
21 He who can gratify moſt, will always be the moſt careſſed.
22 He eſtabliſhes a friend hip, who grants willingly, and refuſes with
23 There is nothing that deceives people more frequently than their
own imaginations.
24. It argues great weakneſs to place a confidence in a bad man.
25 It is prudent and juſt to diſcredit the man who has once deceived
you.
26 He who has been miſled to betray a weakneſs, will never pardon
the perſon who has impoſed upon him.
27 He can have no claim to confidence, who betrays a juft truſt.
28 Nothing places any tranſaction in a more unfavourable point of
view, or is more odious in itſelf, than treachery.
29 Thoſe muſt be fufpected, whoſe miſconduct gives room for fufpi-
cion.
30 A declared miſtruſt, ouly ſerves to provoke, but never to reclaim.
31 'There is nothing more neceſſary to inſpire fidelity, than a ſhow of
confidence.
32. He is the moſt dangerous enemy who acts under the appearance
of friendſhip.
concern.
I %

254
A P P E N D I X.
power united.
33 He who can proſtitute himſelf to injure one man in complaiſance
to another, is qualified to ſerve the vileft purpoſes.
34 Nothing fooner betrays an odious diſpoſition than to inſult the
weak and defenceleſs.
35 There is nothing more incompatible than ſpite and bravery.
36 Private conduct Mows the internal man.
37 Nothing ſooner diſcovers the diſpoſition of a man, than the cona
duct of his dependents.
38 He who makes no allowance for the defects of others, muſt be
eſteemed a weak as well as a bad man.
39 The countenance or applauſe of a bad man is ever a diſadvantage
to him it is given.
40 The friendſhip of a diſhoneſt man is not to be acquired by ho-
neſt means.
41. A bad man covets no other principle in another but the grati-
fication of himſelf,
42 A tyrant admits of no other rule or precedent but his own will.
43 All tyrants covet to be thought good, and will therefore ſeek to
ruin the man who will not applaud even their blackeſt crimes.
44 Tyrants have no principle; that which is matter of diſgrace at
one time is matter of applauſe at another.
45 Tyrants find a pretext for their oppreſſion, in the reſentment
of thoſe they have injured. A tyrant will always juſtify the doing of
one injury, by the committing of another.
46 Nothing is more dreadful than tyranny and
47 Whoever is terrible to others, will ever be afraid of himſelf.
48 Reluctance never accompanies an injurious deſign.
49 He who openly wrongs you, will never be your friend.
50 Vengeance never loſes fight of injuſtice.
5r He who is always feared, muſt be ever hated.
52 A continued dread, provokes men to defperate meaſures.
53 Injuries ſtimulate men to do thoſe things, which otherwiſe they
would not attempt.
54 The more patient a man bears an injury, the more violent he be-
comes when he refents.
55 He who provokes, does ever inſtigate.
56 The tongue may ſometimes be bridled, but the mind can fuffer na
reſtraint.
57 He who countenances or connives at an injury, tolerates the ex-
tenſion of it to himſelf and others.
58 Calumny is the weapon of a coward, and his field the ſecrecy of
others.
59 Truth can be no defamation, it being the inſtrument of juſtice.
60 Falſe informers ſhould be branded with the ſame diſgrace which
they intended for thoſe they fought to injure.
61 Silence in conſequence of cenfure, implies guilt, not contempt.
62 He is little leſs than abandoned, who is regardleſs of fame.
63 He is the moſt contemptible of beings, who has not fpirit to fup-
port the juſtice of his own cauſe.
64 The good conduct of a man is ever a diſgrace to his enemies.
65 Nothing affords a truer ſatisfaction than the reflection of having
done a laudable action.
66 The firſt eſtimation of a man ariſes from himſelf.
67 Merit is the greateſt ornament of dignity.
68 No man can be degraded but by himſelf.
69 The

A P P E N D I X.
255
a
69 The conduct of one man is a leſſon of inſtruction to another.
70 He who boaſts his own merit, pays himſelf, and acquits others of
their obligations to him.
71 He who aſſociates with another, participates of his character.
72 Thoſe will ever combine, whoſe condition and circumſtances are
ſimilar.
73 The individuals of every minority will always league and combine
for their mutual fupport.
74 He who ſcreens a delinquent, is an accomplice of his crimes.
75 He inſults juſtice who countenances a delinquent.
76 Ingratitude is the filth of a baſe mind.
77 There can be no ingratitude in refuſing to do a bad or a diſhonour-
able action.
78 No gratitude can be due upon the reward of having done a bad
action.
79 An obligation is hateful when inattention is a conſequence.
80 A greater acknowledgement cannot be made to a generous friend,
than to appear deſerving of his friendſhip.
81 The more eminent a man is, the more is expected from him.
82 The more conſpicuous the man, the greater the object of envy and
detraction.
83 No one will admire that virtue in another, who is incapable of en-
joying it himſelf.
84 No minds are more ſuſceptible of envy than thoſe whoſe merit is
below their birth and dignity.
85 Nothing expofes a man more to ridicule and inſult than a fuperci
lious air of ſuperiority.
86 Dignity can never be fupported by inſolence.
97 He deceives himſelf, who fancies a kindneſs is due to him on ac-
count only of his fuperior condition.
88 Pride and meanneſs are ever in feparable.
89 A ſupercilious man is ever his own companion.
co He courts contempt, who lays himíelf open to indignity and inſult.
91 No reſentment makes a more durable impreſlion than that of
contempt.
92 A liberty to offend is the privilege of no man.
93 The greateſt teſt of true bravery is a fear to offend.
94. He who offers an infalt bargains for a return.
95 Where the injured has fpirit to demand ſatisfaction, ruin or diſgrace
muſt attend the aggreſſor.
96 An injury is ever new while the effect is felt, or till reparation be
made.
97 Every conceſſion is due to the injured.
98 He renders himſelf odious, who quarrels with another for reſenting
an injury done him.
99 In all quarrels only one party can be culpable, and that is the
aggreffor.
100 Nothing indicates magnanimity more than generoſity to acknow-
ledge an error.
IOI Civility is the cheapeſt, and yet the moſt profitable traffic.
102 There is no character more amiable than that of a mediator.
103 Servility to a ſuperior is ever accompanied with the like inſolence
to an inferior.
104. The oppoſite to oftentation is ever the true character.
TO5 Nothing
a

256
Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν Ο Ι Χ.
a
105 Nothing argues or proclaims a greater conſciouſneſs of inſignifi-
cance, than ſervility,
106 Servility and magnanimity are ever incompatible.
107 Pride and inſolence admit of no diſtinction between ſervility and
reſpect.
108 Nothing can be diſtinguiſhed leſs by a weak underſtanding, or can
operate more powerfully upon it than fervility.
109 When the intellects are weak and the paſſions forong, nothing is
more pernicious than ſervile adulation.
S E C T. II.
of COURAGE and TIMIDITY.
I
Co
YOURAGE is the happy reſult of conſtitution and reflection.
2 No qualification whatever can ſupply the want of courage in
a military perfon.
3 He is the greateſt hero who triumphs over himſelf.
4 Spirit and zeal give life to the ſervice.
5 There can be no true valour, where there is not public ſpirit.
o The more confident a man is of his own power and capacity, with ſo
much the greater reſolution he will act.
7 Confidence of fucceſs begets reſolution.
8 The more that private men can be brought to hold their enemy in
contempt, the more reſolute they become.
9 Knowledge of ſupport re-animates the man.
To Nothing is to be omitted which can invigorate men to a diſcharge
of their duty:
II No difficulty ſeems invincible to the refolute.
I% Motion gives ſpirit as well as force.
13 That which ſerves to encourage one man, will ſerve to intimidate his
opponent at the ſame time.
14 Nothing makes a man more vigilant than the apprehenſion of
danger.
15 All men will fhun danger where there is no incentive.
IÓ Nothing propagates fear more than darkneſs and ſurprize.
17 Of all the ſenſes, none more effectually diſturbs the mind, agitates
the paſſions, and fubverts the underſtanding, than that of the hearing,
I: The beſt troops, if not properly prepared and diſpoſed, are liable to
panics.
19 Nothing can diſhearten a man more, than a knowledge or fuppofi-
tion of his not being upon equal terms with his adverſary.
S E C T.
III.
of SUBORDINA TION.
T
HERE cannot be a greater recommendation to any employ-
2 No authority can exiſt, where there is not a proper ſubmiſſion.
3 He cannot command whoſe confequences is violated.
4 The private and the public man muſt ever be diſtinguiſhed.
5 No Oficer can well be obeyed who is not well reſpected. 6 The

Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν Ο Ι .
257
@ The merit of all actions is ever to be given to him in command.
7 No inferior muſt affect an independance of his ſuperior.
8 Obedience is ever recommended by zeal and attention.
9 Where there is zeal, there can feldom reſt any imputation to a man
diſadvantage.
Io Never conſult with another in point of obedience.
II No inferior muſt alter what his ſuperior directs to be obſerved.
12 Obedience ſuffers no reflection.
13 Orders muſt be obeyed, though they may be remonſtrated againſt
in a proper way if time will admit.
14 Ignorance of an order is no excuſe.
15 A ſubſequent order ſuperſedes a former.
16 The ſenior preſent is the man in immediate command.
17 Command can never expire, while ſeniority exiſts.
18 Every inferior muſt govern himſelf by the orders or example of him
in command.
19 Every inferior muſt be an aſliſtant to his ſuperior.
20 Every inferior muſt give immediate information to his fuperior, of
whatever he hears or eſteems is eſſential to the ſervice.
21 No report can be too fatisfactory; where a report is made to ari
officer of a different corps, the ſignature muſt have the addition of rank
and regiment annexed to it.
22 Never enter into any combination againſt him in command.
23. In all conſpiracies, he is ever held to be a principal, who is of the
greateſt rank or conſequence.
24 There is no danger fo great as that of not acquitting yourſelf.
3
S E C T.
IV.
of the PRINCIPLES OF DISCIPLINE.
*TH The mind acts with the greatest vigour, when confined to a
HE muſt be before it .
2
particular object.
3 Every officer muſt have his poſt affigned or declared.
4 Every officer muſt be poſted where he can be moſt ſerviceable.
5 Every confinement is a reſtriction.
6 Every officer is to be in a capacity to inſpect, direct, and ſee things
done.
7 Where things are not diſtinct in themſelves, there will always be
confuſion.
8 Nothing is military which is in itſelf either tedious or inconvenient.
9 Every object operates beſt, which is leaſt obſtructed or incommoded.
Io Whatever is conſtrained is irkſoine and ungraceful.
II Strength fuffers by conſtraint.
12 That poſition is beit in which a man can moſt conveniently defend
himſelf and
annoy
his
enemy.
13 That diſpoſition is beſt, where each part ſuſtains the other.
14 He ſuffers moſt, who is moſt expoſed.
15 The more compact any body is in itſelf, the more impenetrable it
becomes.
IÓ The more ſimple and comprehenſive any operation is, the better
effeat it will produce.
17 The

258
Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν Ο Ι Χ.
a
17 The leſs complex any operation is, the fooner it will be learned
and the more accurate will be the performance of it.
18 Every operation receives a merit from its conciſeneſs; every action
fhould have a motive, and none to precede command.
19 The leís the pace, whether of time or diſtance, the more accurate
will be the judgment of it.
20 Every object ftands the weaker, by how much its baſe is leſs than
its greateſt diameter.
21 The more any object is ſupported, the firmer it reſts.
22 No independent object can ſuſtain itſelf out of the line of gravity.
23 No dependent object can ſuſtain itſelf.
24, All objects tend to a perpendicular bearing.
25 Whatever is perpendicular can only reft upon its own baſe.
26 The nearer any objedt approaches to a perpendicular, the more it
reſts upon its own baſe.
27 All objects placed in the fame iine of direction from the point of
view, hide or cover each other.
28 If an object is ſo placed as to be in a line with two others, the whole
will then be in one and the fame direction.
29 The nearer that the ſide of any polygon is to the centre of that
figure, the leſs will that fide be.
30 Every figure which carries in its lines its own meaſurement with it,
will be fooneft defcribed, and leaſt liable to error.
31 The ſooner any figure can be deſcribed, the more convenient it.
becomes.
32 Figures are only uſeful by their application.
33 If right lines are not parallel, they will either converge or diverge.
34 'The Phorter any radius is, the fooner its circle will be deſcribed.
35 There can be no balance where there is not a counteracting power.
36 The longer any lever is, the greater its power.
37 The nearer any power approaches the fulcrum of a lever, the more
is its force diminiſhed.
38 Every fulcrum fuftains the whole force of motion contained in each
arm of its lever.
39 The force of motion in the arm of any lever is compounded of its
length and the quantity of matter acting upon it.
40 The force of motion is proportioned to its velocity in the ſame body.
SECT. V
of COMMAND.
HERE is no knowledge ſo uſeful as that of the human heart:
T
2. There is nothing more neceſſary for the fupport of ſubordina
tion than a perfeét knowledge of what is pleaſing or diſguftful.
3 Whatever is ridiculous or abſurd forfeits its importance.
4. Nothing renders things ſooner diſguſtful, than an unneceſſary uſe
and application of them.
5 Thoſe, who want capacity for eſſentials, will ever adopt trifles.
6 Affability alone contributes more to the advantage of the fervice,
than even judgment without it.
7 All officers are to make themſelves an example of good order and
diſcipline to all thoſe ſubordinate to them.
8 All officers ſhould ſtudy to acquire the affection, confidence, and eſ
teem of thoſe ſubordinate to them.
9 It is an unhappy circumſtance to be feared for being juſt, and belov-
ed for being good.
TO AL

Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν Ο Ι Χ.
259
10 All officers are mutually to ſupport the conſequence of each other.
II There is nothing more neceſſary to obſerve, and yet more difficult
to effect, than an equal degree of authority and indulgence.
12 Indulgence ſhould be cautiouſly granted, left it be made a precedent,
and afterwards claimed as a privilege.
13 There is nothing more pernicious in its conſequence, than an inju.
dicious conceſſion.
14 He, who properly divides his cares and functions, makes his autho-
rity more active, extenſive, and deciſive.
15 All events, whether good or bad, generally depend upon the degree
of underſtanding in the commanding officer.
16 No officer can well acquit himſelf, who is ignorant of the duty of
thoſe ſubordinate to him.
I7 No proficience can be acquired, where application is wanting.
18 He, who is ignorant himſelf, can never inſtruct others.
19 Every man is ignorant before he is inſtructed.
20 Thoſe men acquit themſelves beft, who are moſt inſtructed.
21 The leſs complex any operation is, the ſooner it will be learned,
and the more accurate will be the performance of it.
22 That diſcipline is beſt, which is moſt calculated for times and cira
cumſtances.
23 The more ſimple and comprehenſive any diſcipline is, the better ef-
fect it will produce.
24 Where the principles are not good, the ſyſtem muſt be bad.
25 A proficience in any ſcience depends upon a perfect knowledge of
its rudiments.
26 The ſooner any operation is performed, the more time is acquired
for other purpoſes.
27 Diſpatch is the ſoul of action.
28 That theory is beſt which approaches the neareſt to practice,
29 Where there is not method, there muſt always be confuſion.
30 Where things are diſtinct in themſelves, there can be no confuſion.
31 Whatever is regular is always beft.
32 The character of the officer is often deſcribed in the conduct of the
foldier.
33 Very little more is requiſite to be knowr. of an officer's capacity,
than to be informed how he has employed his time.
34 Avoid whatever may reduce thoſe fabordinate to you to acts of dif-
obedience or diſreſpect.
35. There is nothing more difficult, than to reſpect the man who ren-
ders himſelf an object of contenipt.
36 The more an officer's conduct borders on good ſenſe, the greater
deference will be paid to his commands.
37 No government can be fupported by caprice.
38 He forfeits his authority who does not ſupport with fpirit his own
conſequence.
39 There is nothing more hurtful to authority than too intimate an
intercourſe with inferiors.
40 Juſtice and power can only ſupport each other.
41 Nothing is to diſcourage a man in the diſcharge of whatever is nem
ceſſary and proper.
42 He who is brave and generous will ſuffer nothing to come in com-
petition with his duty, or with what he owes to himſelf.
кK
43 Whatever

260
Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν Ο Ι Χ.
43 Whatever
you
determine
upon that is juſt, let it be proſecuted with
vigour and refolution.
44 There is nothing ſo difficult to reclaim, as authority once parted
with.
45 Command admits of no equality.
46 No officer can ſurrender the privilege of his rank.
47 No man can have any other authority than what is preſcribed by
law.
48 He that does what he will, frequently does what he ought not.
49 All power is calculated for public good.
50 No authority can extend to the doing an injuſtice.
51 Nothing renders authority more odious than ſpite and malice.
53 There cannot be a greater reflection upon the conduct of an officer,
than when good men dread to be under his con mand.
54 Authority is an index of the man.
55 He is the beſt officer who is the moſt ſerviceable.
56 Every officer is to inſpect, direct, and ſee things done.
57 Superiority in office is only the ſuperintendance of it.
58 Nothing is beneath an officer to know or to do, which can contri-
bute to the good of the ſervice.
59 Nothing is inconſiderable which is neceſſary to be done.
60 The good of the ſervice is to have the preference of all other confi-
derations.
61 Caſes of neceſſity have rules peculiar to themſelves, though oppoſite
at other times to the diſcipline of the ſervice.
62 Let no jealouſy or diſguſt induce you to hurt the fervice.
63 In matters of moment never rely on your own opinion, but ſeek the
advice of others.
64 It is no reflection upon the underſtanding of a fuperior to be infor-
med by his inferior, but it is a very great one, ſhould he diſcourage fuch
information.
65 Let advice be eſtimated as it is, but not as from whence it comes.
66 No man will adviſe where he does not regard.
67 He acts with the greateſt caution, who thinks his conduct is expoſed
to view.
68 Never delay the doing of that which the preſent time requires to be
done. No work is finiſhed while ſomething remains to be done.
69 He can never be much burdened with buſineſs, who tranſacts it as
it occurs.
70 He who is the moſt expeditious, acquires time for other purpoſes.
71 Revolve well on whatever you have to do.
72 He repents moſt, who deliberates leaſt.
73 He, who can temporiſe moſt, accompliſhes his purpoſes with the
furer ſucceſs.
74 He who is too deliberate frequently loſes the opportunity, which
he that is too hafty never waits to gain.
75 He who is prepared can never be diſtrefied.
76 Reſolution and perſeverance conquer moſt difficulties.
77 He, who accuſtoms himſelf to overlook ſmall affairs, will in timo
habituate himſelf to neglect matters of the greateſt importance.
78 Punctuality is the offspring of habit.
79 Appearance is that index which conveys an idea of what men are
in themſelves best calculated for.
So That

Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν Ο Ι Χ.
261
80 That which conſtitutes the great character, is an happy union of
genius and profeſſion.
81 Nothing cramps more the genius, or contracts more the ideas, than
too minute an attention to ſmall objects.
82 Iſſue no order before there is a neceſſity, nor before its conſequence
is well weighed.
83 An order is a law which muſt not be violated, even by him that
makes it.
84 Nothing is more hurtful to the importance of authority, than the
neceſſity of repealing what imprudence has effected.
85 He aggravates an offence, who perfeveres in an error.
86 Every order muſt ſignify the authority by which it is given, other-
wiſe it is no order, but a recommendation or a deſire,
87 Whatever order you ſhall have occaſion to iſſue, let it be always de-
livered in the ſtile and language of a gentleman and a ſoldier.
88 That rule or order is beſt, which is the moſt ſimple and comprehen-
five in itſelf.
89 No man can obey before he can comprehend.
90 Whoever is appointed for any duty or ſervice, let him be amply
provided with all neceſſary inſtructions,
91 Never ſuffer any order you ſhall iſſue to be treated with the leaſt in-
attention.
92 The moſt judicious order will loſe its efficacy, where all alike will
not ſupport and enforce it.
93 Avoid the diſcovery of an offence, where authority can have no ef-
fect.
94 Juſtice is the parent of good order.
95 A man renders that ſubmiſſion to juſtice and moderation, which
force or violence could never extort from him.
96 Actions founded upon pique or prejudice too often become pernici-
ous precedents.
97 No precedent can juſtify an improper conduct. All cuſtoms which
are unjuſt in themſelves, however made venerable by time, ſhould never
be ſuffered to continue.
98 Where reaſon does not juſtify, cuſtom is a poor pretence.
99 Remove all cauſes of murmur and diſcontent.
100 He excites mutiny, whoſe miſconduct provokes men to reject all
order and obedience.
101 No diſreſpect or breach of diſcipline can be comprehended in a de-
fire of juſtice.
102 No man is to be treated with particularity.
103 Never ſeem to cenſure or to find fault with an officer in the preſence
or hearing of one fubordinate to him.
104 The greater the reſpect ſhown to an inferior officer, the greater
deference will be paid to his authority.
105 Never countenance an inferior in a diſreſpectful behaviour to his
ſuperior.
106 He, who does not diſcountenance, doth always encourage.
107 He promotes diſcord, who countenances party.
108 Whatever complaint or diſpute comes before you, which you can-
not redreſs, or examine well into yourſelf, let the confideration of it be
referred to a board of enquiry.
109 That duty is the beſt performed, which is the moſt controled.
110 Nothing can juſtify a neglect of duty.
HII No fuperior muſt do the duty of his inferior.
ZI2 All

262
Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν D Ι Χ.
II2 All men muſt be countenanced and ſupported in the execution of
their duty.
113 He who inſults another upon his duty, inſults the office, but not
the man.
114 Where different corps continue in the fame place, all to have
equal duty and like uſage.
115 Wilful miſconduct, not errors in judgment, can only be conſtru-
ed a crime.
116 Cenfure no man before you ſhall hear his defence.
117 He who is not willing to hear a juſtification, will ever be deſirous
to condemn.
118 In all controverſies, whatever makes for one party makes againſt
the other at the ſame time.
119 Let puniſhment or reſentment be like the law; not to gratify
revenge, but to deter offenders.
Yzo Let puniſhment be as much as poſſible the effect of a judicial pro-
ceſs.
121 The greater the example, the more powerful the influence.
122 It is a barbarity to puniſh others, for thoſe crimes which we
ourſelves exemplify.
123 Let crimes be conſidered as they are, but not according to the
rank of the criminal.
124 Let no miſconduct eſcape with impunity, nor any merit go unre-
warded.
125 An injudicious lenity is the greateſt cruelty.
126 The putting up with one offence, is the granting a licence for
another.
127 Like cauſes will ever produce like effects.
128 Men are ſooner reclaimed by lenity than ſeverity.
129 There can be no faithful ſoldiers who are too much accuſtomed to
tortures and puniſhments.
I 30 Omit nothing to preſerve a ſoldier's ſpirit, but uſe all means to
reſtrain his licentiouſneſs.
131 Where "reaſon has not time to exert herſelf, the paſſions will
ever predominate.
132 There is nothing more eſſential than a minute attention to the abi-
lities and capacities of men, and to employ them according to their feve-
ral talents.
133 'I he more experienced the inferior, the greater advantage will
reſult to the ſuperior.
134 No commander can be too pice in his choice of men, fince his
own reputation depends ſo much upon their conduct.
135 Nothing ſooner qualifies an inferior, than the underſtanding of his
ſuperior.
136 When a worthleſs perſon is advanced, it is ever to the diſgrace
of him who recommends or appoints him.
137 He who is not worthy of preferment, is not fit to ſerve.
138 Take all opportunities to inculcate and excite emulation.
139 It argues depravity, where officers are not jealous of the dignity
of their reſpective corps.
140 Be always an advocate for thoſe under your command.
141 Let nothing tempt you to conceal the merit of another.
142 The merit of an action, is not to be conſidered by the degree of
the perſon who performs it.
143 Where praiſe is due, let it be ever given.
144 He

A P P E N D I X.
263
144 He wings his fame, who ſhares his glory with thoſe concerned.
145 Great minds are ever pleaſed with the excellencies of others, but
barren faculties are ever provoked at them. Merit gives birth to envy,
but it is merit alone that muſt overcome and deſtroy it.
146 He is a foe to merit, who arrogates to himſelf the genius of
another.
147 All men are pleaſed with regulation and inſtruction, but no
man can endure the diſgrace of being the inſtrument of another's ca-
price.
148. Nothing ſhould be introduced without the ſanction of authority,
149 Every eſtabliſhment merits the higheſt deference.
150 Every improvement muſt be held preſumptive, till approved by
proper authority.
151 Every alteration ſhould carry with it a teſtimony of improve-
ment.
152 Never change one inſignificant form for another.
153 That cannot be called an improvement which is not worthy of
the alteration.
154 Let that which is moſt commodious be always preferred.
155 Obſerve form, where it does not claſh with eſſentials.
156 Nothing engages the attention more than formality.
157 No officer can be in command, who is not at his poſt.
158 It is a greater honour to command, than to be commanded.
159 When different corps meet, the ſenior officer commands the whole,
SECT. VI.
I
of INTELLIGENCE.
T all times endeavour to employ the man who can give you
"A"he belt in formation.
2 Nothing contributes more to the ſucceſs of an enterprize, than good
intelligence.
3 It is next to conqueft to know the deſigns and diſpoſition of the
enemy.
4 Neglect no opportunity to acquire a competent knowledge of the
country wherein you are to ſerve, and of the force that is to oppoſe
you.
5 There can be no greater miſconduct than parſimony to thoſe who
can promote your deſigns, or can furniſh you with good intelligence.
6 There are no tranſactions more ſucceſsful and advantageous, than
thoſe brought about by pecuniary applications.
7 Never diſcover the man you employ to procure you information.
% No information can equal obſervation.
SECT.
VII.
Of POST S.
W!
HERE you are to advance through a defile, occupy by times
its outlet.
2 Never attempt to paſs a river, before the country on the oppoſite
Side is well reconnoitred.
3 When

264
A P P E N D I X.
3 When a river is to be paſſea in the preſence of the enemy, let it be
at the point of that elbow the neareſt to you.
4 Shun the place where you cannot be fully and conveniently ſup-
plied with every neceſſary.
5 Never poſt yourſelf within the reach of the enemy, but with the
atmoſt precaution.
6 Never poſt yourſelf near a place where you may be overlooked or
held in fubjection.
7 Never expoſe your fiank, but always endeavour to gain that of the
enemy
8 Never poſt yourſelf in ſuch a ſituation as will permit the enemy to
act on your fiank, or in your rear.
9 Never poſt yourſelf with a fuperior force, where there are any
means which confine or obſtruct your operations.
Io Always adapt your ſituation to your force.
II There is no ſituation but what may be improved.
12 That part is weakeſt which is moſt commanded, or eaſieſt of acceſs.
13 He is well poſted, whoſe approaches are leſs than the ground he
occupies himſelf.
14 He is well poſted, who reduces the enemy to a particular attack.
15 Let no detachments be poſted beyond the diſtance of their being
timely and conveniently ſupported.
16 Let all detachments have a free communication with thoſe who are
to ſuſtain them.
17 Never let your detachments remain ignorant of thoſe who are to
ſuſtain them, or how they are to join you upon occaſion.
18 Ever encamp with your face to the enemy, except at a fiege, and
then to the place from whence ſuccours may arrive.
19 That diſpoſition is beſt, where each part ſuſtains the other.
20 Never appear in an open place or country with an inferior force.
21 The leſs obſtructed your proſpect, the better your view.
22 He who opens a proſpect, grants a view.
SECT.
VIII.
Of A T TACK.
5
Nand
TOTHING great was ever accompliſhed, where ſecrecy, diſpatch,
refolution were wanting.
2 There is no ſuch being as an inconfiderable enemy.
3 Where your enemies are ſuperior to you, wait for an opportunity to
attack them ſeparately or detached.
4 Never make known your deſigns before the inſtant you are ready to
carry them into execution.
5 Nothing diſtracts or difunites a confederate enemy more than a ſhow
of regard and affection for ſome of its members.
6 Though it is in no man's power to command ſucceſs, yet his good
conduct will greatly contribute to it.
7 Nothing encourages an enemy more than your own imprudence.
8 Never regulate your conduct by any deſire or intimation of the
enemy
9 Nothing makes an enemy more preſumptuous, or puts him ſooner
off his guard, than a ſeeming inattention to his conduct.
IO Let

Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν D Ι Χ.
269
IO Let nothing that is little or inconſiderable divert you, but be al-
ways ſpacious and grand in your views and deligns.
II No medium will ever excite eſteem or admiration.
12 Omit no means to acquire a competent knowledge of the ſituation
and diſpoſition of the enemy, and of the approaches to him.
13 The more effenſive your meaſures, the ſafer you are, and the more
conſiderable you become.
14. He acquires an advantage who deprives his enemy of one.
15 Where the enemy cannot be attacked with any proſpect of ſucceſs
let your operations be ſuch as will either greatly diſtreſs him, or oblige
him to alter his fituation.
16 Avoid making an attack where the danger is confiderable, and the
ſucceſs uncertain.
17 Dependance upon chance is only juſtifiable where a delay will
make matters worſe.
18 Never riſk an acquiſition in purſuit of an object of leſs value.
Ig Riſk nothing except your profpect of advantage is conſiderably
greater than what you may loſe.
20 That ſervice will be the beſt executed which has been the moſt
conſulted.
21 There is nothing more difficult to obtain, than the concurrence of
thoſe who have different views.
22 Where different intereſts claſh, there can never be a zealous' co-
operation.
23 Never undertake an enterprize without being fufficiently provided
with every convenience.
24 Ever provide yourſelf with a reſerve of whatever is neceſſary.
25 That ſervice will be moſt ſucceſsful which is the beſt appointed.
26 On all enterprizes, carefully allot to each diviſion its particular
ſervice.
27 Make no attack without a plan, nor before the enemy is well
reconnoitered.
28 He who makes an attack, ſhould ever remember, that he is to de
fend at the ſame time.
29 In caſe of a repulſe, make no attack before a method and place of
retreat are determined upon.
30 There can be no greater miſconduct, than a neglect to prepare men
for what they have to do, and alſo for that which may happen to them.
31 Every inſcribed figure is leſs than that which circumſcribes it.
32 The longer the ſides of an iſoſceles triangle, the greater the extent
of its baſe.
33 All objects of an equal height, placed behind each other upon a
declivity, will appear in front of different heights.
34 All objects of an equal height, placed behind each other upon au
acclivity, will be concealed by thoſe in their front.
35 The more commanding your ſituation, the better effect your attack
will have.
36 That attack will have the beſt effect, which is the moſt pewerful
and beſt ſuſtained.
37 The weaker your oppoſition, the ſurer your ſucceſs.
38 Any active force will ſooner and more eaſily overcome a leſſer refift-
ance than a greater.
39 The ſucceſs of a ſudden attack chiefly depends upon its vigour and
rapidity.
40 Never

266
Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν D Ι Σ.
40 Never let flip the opportunity of atcacking your enemy, while he
is unprepared or in the leaſt diſorder.
41 Where you make an impreffion, rapidly purſue your advantage.
42 Never give the enemy time to recover from any fudden ſurprize or
diſorder into which you ſhall throw him.
43 Never purſue the enemy beyond the diſtance of your being conve-
niently ſupported, or to a place where an ambuſcade may be formed.
44 Poſſeſs the capital, and the dependencies will fall of courſe.
45 A victory obtained by generoſity and juſtice, is infinitely more
glorious than one acquired by force. Where you are to chooſe, prefer
what is folid to what is fuperficial or ſplendid.
46 There is more judgment in improving a victory, than in gaining it.
An action is to be valued more for its conſequence, than for itſelf.
47 A victory obtained by temerity is often admired, though never wors
thy of praiſe.
48 Succefs, however obtained, generally meets with applaufe.
49 Succeſs too often occaſions a deſtructive confidence.
50 Ever guard againſt making an enemy deſperate.
51 Never publicly cenſure the miſconduct of the enemy, left you
ſhould provoke him to revenge, or excite him to behave better on a future
occaſion.
52 There is nothing more pernicious and diſgraceful, than a ſpirit of
rapine in an army.
53 Nothing more effectually prevents a revolt, than juſtice and
humanity.
54 “ Brave minds, howe'er at war, are ſecret friends,
* Their gen'rous difcord with the battle ends."
SECT. IX.
OF DEFENCE
a
I
TH
THE principles of defence are founded upon thoſe of attack
2 He can beſt defend, who can beſt attack.
3 Defence attends to the whole, attack to a part.
4 Without attention to the parts, the whole can never be preſerved.
5 He who examines well his own condition, contributes the more to
his defence and preſervation.
6 He who would make a good defence, muſt provide himſelf by times
with every neceflary.
7 It is a bad ſituation which yields no reſource.
3 The contempt of a ſubtle enemy is one of the greateſt advantages
you can give him.
9 Omit nothing to obftruét the progreſs and deſigns of the enemy.
10 Whatever diſtreſſes, do always obſtruct.
II. Never ſuffer the enemy to have any acceſs to you, which is not
either defended or obſtructed. Never leave a paſs unguarded, or unat-
tended, by which the enemy can approach.
12 That attack has leaſt effect, which is moſt obſtructed.
13 Never ſuffer the enemy, if you can prevent him, to reconnoitre
your ſituation, or the ground between you and him.
14. Never be intimidated, or drawn from your duty, by any threats or
allurements of the enemy.
15 A generous enemy, like the prince you ferve, will applaud and
admire a noble defence.
I6 He

Α Ρ Ρ Ε Ν Ο Ι Χ.
267
16 He is the moſt ſecure, who is the moſt on his guard.
17 Never be confident of ſafety, while there is a poſſibility of danger.
18 That which is ſtrong in itſelf, becomes weak by ſeparation.
19 The more compact any body is in itſelf, the more impregnable it
becomes.
20' Common danger begets common intereſt.
21 There is no poſition fo defenſible as a direct oppoſition.
22 The greater diſtance at which you can annoy the enemy, the bet-
ter defence you will be able to make.
23 The more extenſive your front, the more defenſible you become.
24 He defends beſt who covers moſt.
25 Never attempt to defend what cannot be defended.
26 Never expoſe yourſelf where there is no occaſion.
27 Nothing guards more effectually againſt a ſurprize, than detached
parties on all quarters.
28 Upon an alarm, firſt put yourſelf in order, and then detach parties
to reconnoitre.
29 Where there is not too great a fuperiority, it is better to meet an
attack than to receive it.
30 Cavalry are of little conſequence againſt infantry that is well dif
poſed or under cover.
31 Regard no treaty, while hoſtilities continue.
32 Where you have a defile to retreat through, poſſeſs by times its inlet.
33 Nothing proclaims more the reputation of an officer, than a judi-
cious retreat.
34 He who violates his parole, not only renders himſelf infamous, but
injures others.
L

C Ο Ν Τ Ε Ν Τ S.
117
IO
145
183
CHAP. I.
CH A P. IV.
10:
Page Duty and inſtructions of the Ad-
SECT. I F dreſs
9 jutant
Art. I Of cloathing
The method of performing the dif-
- 2 Of convenience
ib
ferent kinds of parapet and re-
3 Of appearance
16 joicing fires
144
SECT. II Of arms
18 SECT.III Of the column, exemplifi-
Art. I Of the bayonet
ib ed in a variety of caſes
- 2 Of the firelock
Of paſſing a bridge
SECT. III Of accoutrements 24 Sect. IV Of the ſquare 190
CH A P. II. The ſquare formed out of one bat-
The duty of the Corporal 28
talion, conſiſting of four grand
Sect. I Inſtructions
ib
diviſions exemplified, in twenty-
Sect. II Of reſpect to ſuperiors 29
ſeven particulars
198
Art. 1 Of deportment
30
CH A P. V.
2 Of the ſtanding ſalute 31 The exerciſe as it is to be per-
3 Of the paſſing ſalute
32
formed by ſignal or word of com-
Sect III To ſtand
ib
mand from the major or from
Art. I Of ſtanding erect 33
any other officer
216
2 Of planting the feet 34 A Sketch of a battalion conſiſting
Sect. IV The facings
35 of ten companies, in each fixty-
SECT. V To march
39
nine privates and three corpo-
Art. I To balance the body ib rals, making in the whole ſeven
2 To ground the foot
40
hundred and twenty men rank
3 To limit the ſtep 41
and file, drawn up in reviewing
4 To preſerve equality of order and according to ſeniori-
pace
ib
ty
227
Four propoſitions on the regularity Rules for telling off the battalion
of ſtepping and forming the and for poſting the officers both
ranks
42
at exerciſe and for action 228
Art. 5 Of marching by files, wheel- A Sketch of a battalion formed for
ing, &c.
47 action or exerciſe, with the ranks
at whole diſtance or open or-
C Η Α Ρ. ΙΙΙ.
234
Duty of the Serjeant. Signals, words of command, and
Sect. I Inſtructions in twenty particular references
235
particulars
59
Rules, maxims, and obſervations,
Sect. II The parade exerciſe, with for the government, conduct,
der
uſeful obſervations thereon 66 and diſcipline of an army 151
FI N I S.



1776
ca
WILLIAM L. CLEMENTS
LIBRARY OF
AMERICAN HISTORY
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN